Home

Nikon D300

1. The subject contains many fine details Example a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness Manual Focus Manual focus is available for Focus mode lenses that do not support selector autofocus non AF Nikkor lenses M or when the autofocus does not be produce the desired results A pg 70 To focus manually set the focus mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus A M Selection Autofocus with Manual Priority If the lens supports A M selection set the lens A M switch to M manual If the lens supports M A autofocus with manual priority focus can be adjusted manually regardless of the mode selected with the lens See the documentation provided with your lens for details 71 72 The Electronic Range Finder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed
2. wee D TFT Connect to video device 3 Tune the television to the video channel Turn the camera on and press P button During playback images will be displayed both on the television screen or recorded to video tape and the camera monitor Video Mode pg 314 Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device Television Playback Use of an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 5a or EH 5 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback pg 252 243 244 High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type A HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to camera we N a Connect to high definition device 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel Turn the camera on a
3. Question Key phrase See page Can view my photos on TV Television playback 242 Can view my photos in High Definition HDMI 244 Connecting toa 2 How do copy photos to my computer computer 224 How do I print photographs Printing photographs 230 Can print photos without a computer Printing via USB 231 Can print the date on my photographs Time stamp 234 How do I order professional prints Print set DPOF 240 BE Optional Accessories Question Key phrase See page What optional flash units Speedlights Optional flash units 357 can use What lenses can I use Compatible lenses 350 What AC adapters remote cords and viewfinder accessories are available for Other accessories 364 my camera What memory cards can I use Approved memory 369 cards What software is available for my Other accessories 367 camera Table of Contents QQA MASX nisasie nnana i For Your Safety iii NOTICES sironnan a E Aaa Introduction 1 OVerVieW ssessssesssesssssseseesrsssseseersssses Getting to Know the Camera Camera BOY scssssssccssscssessssseccesssecssnsecssnsesssusecssaseceenseesesnseessnsesesaee The Control Panel sssssssessssssssssssssseeseeseooccccroeerorsessssssrsssnsssnssssssssss 8 The Viewfinder Display ssssssssssssssesssssssesssesssessssssresssssserssssssere 10 The Shooting Information Display ssssssssssssessssssssssrsssssssrrssssssse 12 The Command Dials c
4. settings while the camera exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released Auto Meter Off At default settings the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder pg 52 i a Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 279 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed 547 some memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on Control panel Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings T Check camera settings Exposure mode Exposuremode fp 25 Image size Image quality ee White balance i5 F56 mmm A 47 5 ISO sensitivity Control panel Viewfinder display Default settings are listed below Option Default Description Page Image NORM Record JPEG images at a compression ratio ualit JPEG of roughly 1 8 Ideal for snapshots 56 q y normal Size priority s
5. Format memory card 313 LCD brightness 313 Clean image sensor 371 Lock mirror up for cleaning 374 Video mode 314 HDMI 315 World time 316 Language 316 Image comment 317 Auto image rotation 318 USB 319 Dust off ref photo 319 Battery info 322 Wireless transmitter 2 229 Image authentication 324 Save load settings 325 GPS 203 Non CPU lens data 199 AF fine tune 327 Firmware version 328 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only available when optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is connected and MTP PTP selected for USB pg 319 312 Format Memory Card Format the card Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required m During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the s tt and MODE buttons for about two seconds pg 41 LCD Brightness Press A or W to choose from seven settings Pome for monitor brightness Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness 313 Clean Image Sensor Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to 314 choose options for automatic image sensor cleaning pg 371 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low pass filter that protects the ca
6. Option Description S Single frame Camera takes one photograph each time shutter default release button is pressed CL oe While shutter release button is held down camera low speed records photographs in continuous low speed or CH Continuous continuous high speed mode pg 77 high speed Select Live view In the shooting menu pg 254 highlight Live view and press gt a SHOOTING MENU 10 Color space g Active D Lighting Long exp NR _ High ISO NR EA 150 sensitivity settings fe g Multiple exposure E Interval timer shooting Select Live view mode Highlight Live View mode and press gt Liveview Le L Live view mode io q Release mode Select a live view mode Highlight the desired mode and press to return to the live view menu P Liveview Live view mode 5 EEH Hand held E Tripod 81 p 82 4 Select Release mode Highlight Release mode and press gt P Liveview Le Y Live view mode ic Ho Release mode 5 Select a release mode Highlight the release mode that will be during live view and press Liveview E Release mode EE Sinole frame OK Ct Continuous low speed ch Continuous high speed 6 Exit to shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway to exit the menus and return to shooting mode Hand Held Mode 1 Select live view mode
7. Take pictures Take pictures 79 80 Live View Options Before taking pictures using live view rotate aE the mode dial to live view and choosea live view mode and the release mode that BM Live vien mode will be used while the camera is in live view PEAT mode The following live view modes are available Option Description Choose when taking hand held shots of moving aA Hand held subjects or when framing photographs at angles that default make it difficult to use the viewfinder pg 83 Camera focuses normally using phase detection autofocus Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod View can be enlarged in monitor for precise focus making this mode suitable for static subjects pg 87 Autofocus a Tripod can be used to compose photographs with subject positioned at any point in the frame without recomposing photograph Camera focuses using contrast detect autofocus Phase Detection Versus Contrast Detect AF The camera normally uses phase detection autofocus in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor When Tripod is selected in live view however the camera uses contrast detect autofocus in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast Contrast detect autofocus takes longer than phase detection autofocus Release mode can be chosen from the following options
8. Option Description On default The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met 1 Single servo autofocus is selected for focus mode pg 62 2 Auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode pg 64 or single point or dynamic area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected Off The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also See page 355 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist 273 274 a10 AF On for MB D10 Choose the function assigned to the AF 0N button on the optional MB D10 battery pack Option Description AF ON Pressing the MB D10 AF ON button initiates AF ON default autofocus Bi AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed fia AE lock only Exposure locks while the MB D10 AF 0N button is pressed AE lock Reset on release me Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time the shutter is released o
9. s sss00 pg 220 Protecting Photographs from Deletion pg 221 Deleting Individual Photograph scesssssseees pg 222 205 206 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the P button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor 100ND300 _ DSC_0010 JPG NORMAL 22 12 2007 12 29 18 4288x2848 Multi selector Sub command dial T button E button O n button amp button amp button button Main command dial Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 251 100ND300 22 12 200 To Description View Press gt to view photographs in order additional recorded lt to view photographs in photographs reverse order View photo Press A or to view information information about current photograph pg 208 View See page 218 for more information on thumbnails the thumbnail display Zoom in on Q See page 220 for more information on photograph playback zoom 2 Confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete mages a Press again to delete photo Change To protect image or to remove protect On protection from protected image press status O n button pg 221 Return to j shooting Io Monitor will turn o
10. 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 2 Display the Clean image SETUP MENU Format memory card j sensor menu gt LCD briohtness o 3 gt OCK mirror up Tor cleaning Highlight Clean image sensor Earner A T HDMI AUTO in the setup menu and press Ward tins ms Language En Image Sensor Cleaning If the options described in this section are not sufficient to remove dust or other foreign objects from the image sensor clean the sensor manually as described on page 374 371 3 Select Clean now F Clean image sensor Highlight Clean now and press gt The message shown at right will be displayed while cleaning is in progress bm Clean now gt ic g Clean at startup shutdown amp gt Clean image sensor ot Cleaning image sensor The message shown at right E Clean imase sensor will be displayed when cleaning is complete HE Clean at Startup Shutdown 1 Select Clean at startup i Clean image sensor shutdown Y Clean now Display the Clean image sensor menu as described in Step 2 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and press gt ic Poy Clean at startup shutdown 8 gt 372 2 Select an option gt Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown Highlight one of the following options and pre
11. Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera f 1 1 1 2 106 1 250 s 60 s Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 108 1 250 s 30 s 2 Set automatically by camera 1 250 s 1 60 s 12 Value selected Value selected by user by user 1 250 s 30 s 2 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 Speeds as fast as s 000 s are available with optional SB 800 and SB 600 flash units when 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity Consult table of flash ranges pg 405 when setting aperture in A and M modes A 109 M 111 At default settings the effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the depth of field preview button to emit a modeling preflash pg 298 Take the picture Compose the photograph focus and shoot If the flash ready indicator 4 blinks for about three seconds after the photograph is taken the flash has fired at full output and the photograph may be underexposed Check the results in the monitor If the photograph is underexposed adjust settings and try again See Also See page 289 for information on 1 320 s Auto FP Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the
12. wide landscape orientation 251 Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder pg 249 Hidden images pg 249 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start and press amp The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress To Press Description Skip back skip Press lt to return to previous frame gt to skip ahead to next frame View additional F photo info Change photo info displayed pg 208 Pause slide show Pause slide show see below Exit to playback menu Exit to playback 5 End slide show and exit to full frame pg 206 mode or thumbnail playback pg 218 Exit to shooting g Press shutter release button halfway to return mode EA to shooting mode MENU End slide show and return to playback menu A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the slide was paused the show ipa will resume from the next slide or Exit to Oskar ited Exit return to the pla back menu 252 Print Set DPOF Choose Select set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF compatible device pg 240 Choose Deselect all to remove all pictures from the cur
13. 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon 100ND300 _ DSC_0778 15 12 2007 10 15 29 EH Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu 1 Select an item in the retouch menu Press A or W to highlight an item P to select Depending on the option selected a menu may be displayed highlight an option and press gt a RETOUCH MENU e D Lighting a Redeye correction Trim Monochrome feed Filter effects T Color balance Image overlay 2 Selecta picture The pictures on the memory card will be displayed Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button F Black and white pU pE KM Ra Ba E fi Zoom OK 331 332 3 Display retouch options Press to display retouch options see the section for the selected option for details To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU O cance mg Wsave Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon 100ND300 _ DSC_0778 JP J 15 12 2007 10 15 2 m m Retouching Copies Copies created with Trim can not be further modified D lighting red eye correction filter effects and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existi
14. Default when no previously saved value Adiust exists for the current lens Move focal Previous point toward value camera 327 328 Option Description List previously saved AF tuning values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a 1 icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press 1 To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as List the last two digits of the lens serial iy AF fine tune saved number to distinguish it from other a ee nee values lenses of the same type highlight the F3 5 5 6 VR No 1 ca desired lens and press The menu shown at right will be displayed press A or W to choose an identifier and press to save changes and exit M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tripod Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast detect autofocus when Tripod is selected in live view mode pg 86 Saved Value Only one value can be stored per lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card The retouch menu is only displayed wh
15. Menu Description Playback Adjust playback settings and manage photos pg 246 Shooting Adjust shooting settings pg 254 Custom Settings Personalize camera settings pg 264 Setu Format memory cards and perform basic camera P setup pg 312 Create retouched copies of existing photographs K Retouch pg 329 My Menu Create a menu of custom options pg 344 25 26 Using Camera Menus BE Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Select Move cursor up highlighted item Select Cancel and return highlighted item 1 gt to previous menu or display sub MERY button Move cursor down Select highlighted item BE Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu Press lt to highlight the icon for the current menu oc SHOOTING MENU P3 Shooting menu bank Reset shooting menu Active folder File naming EA Image quality TE Image size JPEG compression E NEF RAW recording 3 Select a menu Press A or to select the desired menu PLAYBACK MENU e Delete Playback folder Hide image __ Display mode Image review TE After delete Rotate tall El Slide show 4 Position the cursor in the mm PLA
16. 5 Take the picture 4 Press the shutter release button the rest lt of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the same as that selected for standard shooting 1 No Picture After shooting play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded Note that the sound the mirror makes when the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF 0N button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter and that pressing the shutter release button all the way down when the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF will end live view without a photograph being recorded m 85 p 86 Tripod Mode 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface 2 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly 3 Framea picture in AF ON button the viewfinder Frame a picture in the viewfinderand US select a focus point r using the multi selector then press the AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the camera can noT be focused by pressing the shutter release button halfway i5 S
17. Done is O Data imprint O Imprint date 1 Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order pg 236 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW pg 56 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created 241 242 Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D100 video cable can be used to connect the D300 to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type A High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the video cable 2 Connect the supplied video cable as shown Connect to camera
18. Eoo Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional S hutter speed flash flashunit flash flash unit flash flash unit 1 8 000 1 320 S Auto FP Auto FP 1 320 1 250 S Flash sync Auto FP 1 250 30 s Flash sync Flash range drops as shutter speed increases M The Flash Ready Indicator When the flash fires at full power the flash indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed Note that the flash ready indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected 289 290 Note however that flash range will drop at shutter speeds between 250 and 1 320 s The effective Guide Number varies with zoom angle as shown below Zoom angle 14mm 17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85 mm 105 mm Guide No 17 56 19 62 30 98 32 105 38 125 44 144 50 164 53 174 56 184 ISO 200 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 800 Calculating Flash Range D maximum range GN Guide Number f number aperture For example at a zoom angle of 35 mm an aperture of f 5 6 and an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 the flash will have a maximum range of D 38 5 6 6 7 m or in feet D 125 5 6 22 ft 3 in The minimum range can be read directly from the flash range bar graph or exposure meter For each
19. 1 IX Nikkor lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 4 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 5 Electronic range finder can not be used with shifting or tilting 6 Manual exposure mode only 7 Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only pg 353 8 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8S AF 35 70mm f 2 8S new AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5S or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5S lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte 10 11 12 20 screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Some lenses can not be used see page 352 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8S ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4S ED is mounted on camera If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 198 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 198 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved For improved precision specify le
20. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly 2 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor instead of the viewfinder for improved focus pause briefly with the shutter release button pressed halfway before pressing it the rest of the way down To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU 83 p 84 3 Framea picture in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 3 x press the amp button Q button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll within the AF area brackets Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C Press the shutter release v button halfway or press the AF ON button The camera will ay focus normally and set exposure Note that the mirror will click back into place while either button is pressed temporarily interrupting live view Live view is restored when the button is released The focus point can be selected using the multi selector Manual focus focus mode M pg 71 Focus using the lens focusing ring The focus point for electronic range finding can be selected using the multi selector
21. The D300 is equipped with a ten S SA pin remote terminal for remote ZS Co control and automatic S photography The terminal is provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Remote terminal accessories Accessory Description Length Remote shutter release with blue yellow Remote Cord and black terminals for connection to a 1m MC 22 remote shutter triggering device allowing 3 ft 3 in control via sound or electronic signals Remote shutter release can be used to Remote Cord 80 cm MC 30 reduce camera shake or keep the shutter 2 ft 7 in open during a time exposure Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce R camera shake or keep the shutter open emote cole during atime exposure Equipped with S gt cm MC 36 a Po a PE 2 ft 9 in back lit control panel shutter release lock for use in bulb photography and timer that beeps at one second intervals Extensi n Cord Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 Sf 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can MC 21 be used at a time fE 10 iri Connecting Cord Connects two cameras for simultaneous 40 cm MC 23 operation 1 ft 4 in Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for connection to devices with two pin D i terminals including the MW 2 radio a control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 f modulite c
22. i to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image oca i sia Zoom out QET not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame f Navigation window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel zoom View other areas of image Cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy will be created Create copy GR that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye 335 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected 4182041280 TENT photograph The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table To Use Description Press the 9 button to reduce the size Reduce size of crop Giz theab z i of the crop Increase size of Q Press the amp button to increase the size crop of the crop gt Changecropaspect J Rotate the main command dial to 5 EA switch between aspect ratios of 3 2 ratio Ree 4 3 and5 4 N Use multi selector to move the crop to Move cro P another area of the image Press center of multi selector to preview cropped image Preview crop Create copy es Save the current crop as a s
23. photograph so that it can be 15 12 2007 1 deleted display the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the O n button NORMAL 4288x2848 Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n and buttons together for about two seconds 221 A 222 Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the button Once deleted photographs can not be recovered 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T button A confirmation dialog will be displayed t Delete 9 73 ae poo A 1000300 05C 000 5 12 2007 10 Full Frame Playback 1 Delete 9 33 Cancel 00 3 100 4 Thumbnail Playback To delete the photograph press the i button again To exit without deleting the photograph press the gt button See Also To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 248 The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted pg 251 Connections Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to vi
24. red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms pg 210 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press to copy the photograph Increase amount of green Increase ce Increase amount of 4j amount of blue e amber Increase amount of magenta Creating JPEG Copies of NEF RAW Pictures To create a JPEG copy of an NEF RAW picture select the NEF RAW picture for Color balance and press without modifying color balance The JPEG copy will have an image quality of fine and a size of L 338 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals with results that are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size pp 56 60 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay is Image overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press gt The dialog shown at right will be displayed wi
25. 138 Direct measurement Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photograph card pg 142 136 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset pg 146 d 0 Stores last value measured for white balance pg 138 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured PRE Select d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 pg 141 PRE Select _OWSet Store values copied from images on memory card pg 142 Y 100 3 100 a io 100 4 100 5 100 6 PRE Set Zoom Delect Set White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks pg 255 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank no warning is displayed for preset d 0 137 BE Measuring a Value for White Balance 138 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 pg 113 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button
26. 5 d 0 d 2 i E d 3 d 4 d 1 PRE Select Set 3 Select Set Highlight Set and press gt Fine tuning menu for the selected white balance preset is displayed pg 132 es White balance E Preset manual g d1 M set Edit comment Select image Copy H0 Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed WB button Sub command dial Control panel 145 H Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset White balance Incandescent manual J Fluorescent AN Direct sunlight Highlight Preset manual in l ee the white balance menu pg Eee 1 28 and press gt NVA 2AE Preset manual gt 2 Selecta preset E White balance Le Highlight the desired preset P Fra iy and press the center of the f AR ae ya 5 d 3 d 4 multi selector a PRE Select Set Select Edit comment E White balance Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and press gt Select image Copy d 0 146 Edit the comment E White balance fe I SH amp 4 Edit the comment as described on page Ce eR 256 me MNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
27. 800 1600 3200 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 1 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens 405 406 Specifications EE Nikon D300 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera with interchangeable lenses Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective picture angle Approx 1 5 x lens focal length Nikon DX format Effective pixels Effective pixels 12 3 million Image sensor Image sensor 23 6 x 15 8 mm CMOS sensor Total pixels 13 1 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX software required Storage Image size pixels 4 288 x 2 848 L e 3 216 x 2 136 M e 2 144 x 1 424 S File format e NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compressed or uncompressed TIFF RGB e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome storage for up to nine custo
28. Control panel Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the shooting menu pg 254 60 Focus Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses FOCUS MOCO ixc ccccccsecccussosocsesecssscucssncevaresccerecssrscenescersscseeseses pg 62 AFArea Modenan eeror kerren s E AEREE ASe NEEE pg 64 Focus Point Selection ssscessssssssssesesesessscacerssesseess pg 66 Focus EOGKircrccccscosccccccessososrenscsceseccenesvucescosrsstacscscescerunceersesss pg 68 EAEI ROCUS sccccecccccsssnesvesescssrsecscestesessersaceseeceeesorosscnseserss pg 71 61 62 Focus Mode Focus mode is controlled by the Focus mode selector focus mode selector on the front of the camera There are two autofocus AF modes in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and one manual focus mode in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens Option Description Camera focuses when shutter release button is pressed 5 halfway Focus locks when in focus indicator appears Sinale servo in viewfinder and remains locked while shutter release g AF button is pressed halfway focus lock At default settings shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button c is press
29. Control without further modification 4 Edit the selected Picture Control Sharpening Y Contrast See page 153 for more Brightness A T F Saturation information To abandon any Hue changes and start over press ri DOK Rest the button Press when settings are complete 5 Select a destination ey Manage Picture Control Oy Save as Choose a destination for the E custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt FACE Unused ECT Unused 157 158 6 Name the Picture Control wm o123456789 Keyboard f gt 70MBCDEFGHI area The text entry dialog shown P CULLA at right will be displayed By Name area default new Picture E ae Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control This name can be edited to create a new name as described below To move the cursor in the name area press the 9 button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the 7 button Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long Any characters after the 19th will be deleted After entering the name press The Set Picture Control new Picture Control will appear in the a Eso Standard __ Picture Control
30. No limit 279 280 c3 Self Timer Delay This option controls the length of the shutter release delay in self timer mode Choose from 25 55 10s and 20s c4 Monitor off Delay This option controls how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed Choose from 10 s 20 s 1 minute 5 minutes or 10 minutes Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter Option 2s 2s Obs 5s Oils 10 s default Ms 20s Option Dils 10s 02s 20 s default in 1min m 5min Dlm 10 min d Shooting Display d1 Beep Choose High or Low to sound a beep when the self timer is used or the camera focuses in single servo autofocus note that a beep will not sound if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 268 Option Description High Choose the pitch of the beep default from High and Low A J icon is displayed in the control panel H L Low and shooting information displays Off Turn the beep speaker off d2 Viewfinder Grid Display Choose whether on demand grid lines are displayed in the viewfinder or in live view mode in the monitor for reference when composing photographs Option Description On O
31. Optional Flash Units Speedlights The D300 can be used with CLS compatible flash units The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography The Creative Lighting System supports the following features e i TTL flash control Improved through the lens TTL flash control for use with CLS see page 172 Flash level is set using monitor pre flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject ensuring that the level is adjusted appropriately for ambient lighting e Advanced Wireless Lighting Allows i TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units e FV lock pg 180 Locks flash level at the metered value allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level e Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 289 Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field 357 358 HE CLS Compatible Flash Units The D300 can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units the SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 The SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below Flash unit Feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 Guide IS0 100 38 125 30 98 21 69 10 32 No 2 180200 53 175 42 138 30 98 14 49 A
32. Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect EWI Vivid Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors EMC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs ESD Standard BE Choosing a Picture Control 1 Select Set Picture Control SHOOTING MENU White balance AUTO Py Set Picture Control aaa Manage Picture Control _ Color space A Active D Lighting TE Long exp NR High ISO NR El ISO sensitivity settings In the shooting menu pg 254 highlight Set Picture Control and press gt 2 Select a Picture Control Sy Set Picture Control 10 ED Standard ENL Neutral Highlight the desired Picture 2 Control and press ze EMC Monochrome Grid Adjust 150 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected To select a different Picture Control press A or W then press Gist Adiust GOK gt to display Picture Control options and press The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display when the MA button is pressed Picture Control indicator 151 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the user s creative intent C
33. This setting controls whether the built in flash and the SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 and other optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System CLS see page 357 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 298 for more information See Also See page 98 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control For information on using the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds see page 262 For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 For information on changing the roles of the main and sub command dials see Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 308 105 F Programmed Auto 106 In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Select exposure mode F Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until F is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Shutter speed 1 320 5 Aperture f 9 Flexible Program In exposure mode
34. Wireless Lighting A master flash meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 306 or Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 Other Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings making multiple exposures interval timer photography and using GPS units and non CPU lenses Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings pg 184 Multiple EXPO SULE eeaeee isoeo teete ttek iek oE rE eti T pg 186 Interval Timer Photography ssssossososcoscscoscsscscssesee pg 191 NON CERUILENSES tick sccsccccccccescsestecesestescescecacssesseseseserecates pg 198 KETENE A e A E O pg 201 183 184 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the QUAL and 4 buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off button briefly while settings are reset QUAL button Option Default Option Default Focus point Center Bracketing off Exposure mode Programmed Flash mode Front curtain auto sync Flexible program Off Flash off Exposure off compensation compensation FV lock off AE hold Off Multiple exposure Off 1 Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 is unaffected Ej 2 Number of shots
35. _ displayed 4 Assign FUNC button KS 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected n CD best sad toni items el Yes N Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the i button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press again to remove the selected item from My Menu 346 Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu 1 highlight Rank items and press gt Select an item Highlight the item you wish to move and press gt Rank items a Image quality RAW __ JPEG compression th NEF RAW recording 8 4 Assign FUNC button 8 Select items Position the item Press Aor Wto move the item up or down in My Menu and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items i Rank items e Image quality JPEG compression s NEF RAW recording S t4Assign FUNC button Move WOK 347 348 Technical Notes Camera Care Options and Resources This chapter covers the following topics Compatible LenseS s sesseseseseseesesosesessososescscosososeseseoso pg 350 Optional Flash Units Speedlights ecscsceeee pg 357 OthemAccessories sirccsssccccssscsctscscessseccceccestessecsscusacsesseres pg 364 Caring for the Cameta scsscssscscsssesscesscsscecececsssesers pg 370 SUOLAG Citarerteccrateciscerterrcecer mee N pg 370 GUCCI reo A oan eee pg 370
36. camera settings to suit individual preferences In addition to Custom Settings Custom setting bank and a a Aitafoos Reset custom settings settings in the FS priority selection al Focus point wrap around a8 AF point selection b Metering exposure Custom Setting groups ON AUTO OFF AFS1 Custom Settings menu are divided into icta ag ocus tracking with lock on the six groups shown at right a Pi ISO sensitivity step value 1 3 ig veEV steps for exposure cntl b3 Exp comp fine tune M 5 Center weishted area S6 Fine tune optimal exposure Main menu W Easy exposure compensation OFF 8 g c1 Shutter release button AEL OFF E c2Auto meter off delay E Custom setting bank Blk Re Shutter release button AE L Kuzz c2 Auto meter off delay c3 Self timer delay a Autofocus 4 c4 Monitor off delay 2 a1Beep b Metering exposure 1E d2 Viewfinder arid dislay a3 Viewfinder warning display CELTIE a Shooting display 2Niewfinder grid display y 23 Viewfinder warning display a4 CL mode shooting speed 45 Max continuous release 46 File number sequence aT Shooting info display E OCustom setting bank 48LCD illumination Bracketing flash 6s bs Oils Os 4H 4H OFF ON 3 H Flash sync speed 1 250 Flash shutter speed Flash cntrl for built in flash isc Rename mq Modeling flash Auto bracketing set L2 of Auto bracketing Mode M
37. displayed if maximum 198 Aperture shown in aperture is specified stops from maximum aperture _ Camera unable to focus Focus manually 7 blinks using autofocus e Use a lower ISO 96 sensitivity e In exposure mode p Subject too bright oe NP 369 Hi photo will be overexposed 5 Increase shutter 108 speed A Choose a smaller 109 aperture larger f number 389 390 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page e Use a higher ISO 96 sensitivity e In exposure mode Subject too dark photo P Use flash 173 ie will be underexposed Lower shutter 108 speed A Choose a larger 109 aperture smaller f number bib butbsleedin Goasse PE y y blinks exposure mode 5 J exposure mode Optional flash unit that Change flash mode 4 does not support i TTL setting on optional 360 blinks blinks flash control attached flash an P and set to TTL Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page If indicator blinks for 3s check photo n 4 monitor if after flash fires photo 174 blinks underexposed adjust may be underexposed settings and try again Memory insufficient to Reduce quality or 56 60 Euth gu record further photos alee blinks blinks at current settings or Delete photographs 248 camera has run out of e Insert new memory 39 file or folder numbers card Release shutter If err
38. e Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 e PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 e 21mm f 4 old type e PC 35mm f 3 5 old type e K2 rings e 1000mm f 6 3 Reflex old type e ED 180 600mm f 8 serial numbers 1000mm f 11 Reflex serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 e ED 360 1200mm f 11 serial e 2000mm f 11 Reflex serial numbers numbers 174031 174127 200111 200310 e 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring CPU lens 7 Type Glens Type D lens The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF lenses e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF 1 500mm f 4D ED e AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED II e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S 600mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF I 600mm f 4D ED e AF I 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 300mm f 4D ED e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR e AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S NI
39. gt i e Load save 2 Select a Picture Control E Manage Picture Control PROGO J Highlight a custom Picture Pa Gexeson o Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt 3 Select Yes i Manage Picture Control Delete Highlight Yes and press to T T Pelete Picture Contro delete the selected Picture STANDARD 02 Control z es No Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera Standard Neutral Vivid and Monochrome can not be renamed or deleted 164 HE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card 1 Select Load save A Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Load save ON and press gt 2 Select Delete from card Manage Picture Control 10 Load save Highlight Delete from card and press Pb f ee atetonat e Copy to card as 165 3 Select a Picture Control L Manage Picture Control Delete from card 1101 STANDARD 02 Highlight a custom Picture Clo2NEUTRAL 02 Control slot1 through 99 and e SE either G Grid Confirm e press gt to view current E HONOCHROWE 02 Picture Control settings or O Sharpening Contrast 7 Brightness Filter effects Toning ria Cyanotype 4 D 4A G Grid Done e press to display B Manage Picture Control confirmation dialog shown at Pde rig ht Delete Picture Control WONOCHROME 02 Yes 4 Select Yes es Manage Picture Control Del
40. option as described below Shooting Menu Bank The control panel and shooting information displays show the current shooting menu bank EE Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1 1 Select a ban k Shooting menu bank Pe Rename Highlight the desired bank and press gt 255 256 2 Entera name Keyboard area E Shooting menu balk To move the cursor in the name ESSA area press the amp 4 button and o BRERA press lt or gt To enter a new f A uNoworstuvwxyzt letter at the current cursor JE position use the multi selector Xv Cursor Glout WOK to highlight the desired Name area character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the f button To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name press the MENU button Bank names can be up to twenty characters long Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted 3 save changes and exit After editing the name press to save changes and exit button The Shooting menu bank menu willbe pemu displayed i Rename i H B Ec D Reset Shooting Menu Choose whether to restore default settings for the current shooting menu bank See page 398 for a list of default settings With the excepti
41. or photographs that N 1512 2007 19 75 29 have been retouched can be selected NORMAL 4288x2848 2 Select Side by side comparison Highlight Side by side ya comparison and press N m0 Side by side comparison 2 Cancel 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press the multi selector in the direction indicated by the arrow adjacent to the highlighted image A V lt or P to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the amp button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image To exit to playback mode press the gt button To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image displayed press or the center of the multi selector Source Retouched image copy 343 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below For information on basic menu operations see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items MY MENU e Image quality I
42. s s 11911291120012 7 Focal length ssssssssssresssrssssrrsses 8 GPS data indicator 9 Image comment INdICAtOT ue eessssesscsstecesseteccsseeseeese 10 Flash mode 11 Flash compensation 178 12 Exposure compensation 116 13 Metering method e 102 14 Exposure MOe ssseescscesseeeeee 104 15 Shutter speed 108 111 16 Aperture 109 111 E Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 17 Picture Control ssssssssssssssessssseess 150 18 Active D Lighting s 168 19 File NAME ssssssssssssssssesssseessesessse 260 20 Image QUality csessecsseeesseeneee 56 21 IMAGE SIZE oo essessssessseessseessseesssees 60 22 Image authentication TCI CATON sssssisssissiesirsesssssrssasrirsese 324 23 Time Of recording 36 NORMAL 4288x2848 l 21 24 Date of recording 25 Folder NUM bEr ssssssssssssssresssessss 26 White balance on essences Color temperature esse White balance fine tuning Preset manual 27 Color space 217 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four or nine images press the 9 button Full frame playback Thumbnail playback 218 The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed To Use Description Press 9 button to zoom out Display more qE from one to four images per
43. sessescscssseccecsseeeceees 129 White balance fine tuning INdICAtOT siccirescsscntecerardansisletansorencecaioess Auto area AF indicator FOCUS points indicator s ssssssssssssses AF area mode indicator 3D tracking indicato Image quality sssssssssssssssssssssrsssssssssese Interval timer indicator Image comment indicator 317 Clock not set indicator 38 388 13 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings I Fn button Bracketing 4 button Flash mode Flash compensation Sub command dial QUAL button Image NA button quality size AE Exposure compensation WB button E MODE button White SF Exposure balance mode ISO button isO Main command dial sensitivity 14 BE Image Quality and Size Press the QUAL button and rotate the command dials Set image quality pg 57 A QUAL button Main command dial f Choose an image size pg 60 QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel HH SO Sensitivity Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial Set ISO sensitivity pg 96 tas 200 Ss ISO button Main command dial Control panel 15 16 BE Exposure Press the MODE button and ro
44. the display a SHOOTING MENU Color space j p Active D Lighting Long exp NR High ISO NR 150 sensitivity settings TE Live view Multiple exposure interval timer shooting O n button Multiple exposure Record the specified number of shots as a single image If no operations are performed for 30 s shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from any photographs that have been taken 29 First Steps Charge the Battery The D300 is powered by an EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery supplied The EN EL3e is not fully charged at shipment To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 18a quick charger before use About two and a quarter hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 30 3 insert the battery Insert the battery into the charger The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges mal ON S 28 CHARGE O Eno A RUICK CHARGER 4 Remove the battery when charging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Remove the battery and unplug the charger 32 Insert th
45. 135 5000K Set Picture Control pg 148 Standard Color space pg 169 sRGB Active D lighting pg 168 Off Long exp NR pg 262 Off High ISO NR pg 263 Normal ISO sensitivity settings pg 96 ISO sensitivity pg 96 200 ISO sensitivity auto control pg 98 Off Live view Live view mode pg 80 Hand held Release mode pg 81 Single frame Multiple exposure pg 186 Reset Interval timer shooting pg 191 Reset 1 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset 2 Applies to all banks Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress 3 Applies to all banks Shooting ends when reset is performed 398 HE Defaults Restored with Reset Custom Settings pg 266 Option Default al AF C priority selection pg 267 Release a2 AF S priority selection pg 268 Focus a3 Dynamic AF area pg 269 9 points a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 270 Normal a5 AF activation pg 271 Shutter AF ON a6 AF point illumination pg 271 Auto a7 Focus point wrap around pg 272 No wrap a8 AF point selection pg 272 51 points a9 Built in AF assist illuminator pg 273 On a10 AF ON for MB D10 pg 274 AF ON b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 275 1 3 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntr
46. 200 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f 1 4 D Qe ean Verano or v9 One t1 1 4 f 2 2 8 f 4 5 6 1 8 11 16 f 22 32 1 4 f 16 Aperture Ibo 2 6 amp 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 17 1 3 EV are reduced to 17 1 3 EV 404 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range The range of the built in flash varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range 200 400 800 1600 3200 m ft 1 4 2 2 8 4 5 6 1 0 8 5 3ft 3in 27ft 11in 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 0 7 6 1 2ft 4in 20ft 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 0 6 4 2 2ft 13ft 9in 4 5 6 8 11 16 0 6 3 0 2ft 9ft 10in 5 6 8 11 16 22 0 6 2 1 2ft 6ft 11in 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 5 2ft 4ft 11in 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 1 2ft 3ft 7in 16 22 32 0 6 0 8 2ft 2ft 7in The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In programmed auto exposure mode mode F the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400
47. 205 Can not select focus point e The camera is in menu operation 245 e Press shutter release button 46 halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters Camera is slow to record Turn long exposure noise reduction 262 photos off e Sound of mirror clicking down 85 when shutter release button was pressed halfway in hand held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter Phot i Stos n trecordediin e Unless Release is chosen for 85 268 live view mode Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand held mode 383 384 Problem Solution Page e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or 96 263 Randomly spaced bright turn high ISO noise reduction on pixels noise appearin e Shutter speed is slower than 8 s 263 photos use long exposure noise reduction e Camera is in focus mode C 62 e Center focus point is not selected 64 for single point AF or dynamic area AF ApSesistiluminator dges Off selected for Custom Setting 273 a9 Built in AF assist not light illuminator e Illuminator has turned off automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Photos are blotched or e Clean lens smeared e Clean low pass filter 371 e Adjust white balance to match 128 Colors are unnatural Ignis outes e Adjust Set Picture Control 148 settings c
48. 67 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus pg 70 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus J D point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus 2 Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder Single servo AF Focus will lock automatically when the in focus indicator appears and remain locked until you remove your finger g 7 N from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see following page 68 Continuous servo AF Press the AE L AF L button to lock both focus and exposure an AE L icon appears D in the viewfinder see page 114 Focus and exposure will remain locked while a the AE L AF L button is pressed even if Shuttersralease you later remove your finger from the button shutter release button 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE L AF L button is pr
49. 98 95 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 3200 in steps equivalent to 1 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 and 0 3 1 EV above ISO 3200 are also available for special situations ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder IS0 button Main command dial oD 1 0 TE GE Control panel Viewfinder ISO sensitivity 3200 The ISO Sensitivity Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu pg 254 96 ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 275 Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value ISO sensitivity settings available LO 1 LO 0 7 LO 0 3 200 250 320 400 500 i i 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 HI 0 3 HI 0 7 HI 1 LO 1 LO 0 5 200 280 400 560 800 1100 1 2 step 1600 2200 3200 HI 0 5 HI 1 1 step LO 1 200 400 800 1600 3200 HI 1 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting HI 0 3 HI1 The setting
50. Custom M Reset custom Bracketing order setting bank pg settings pg 266 f oa f Controls 1 Multi selector center button 1180 TIL ON iB gra N a 266 By Fi Multi selector center button BE g 2 Multi selector 3 Photo info playback 4 Assign FUNC button 5Assign preview button T 6 Assign AEL AF button 7 Customize command dials E _ 8Release button to use dial OFF OFF Q a A OFF j The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Page Custom Setting Page Custom setting bank 266 d Shooting display Reset custom settings 266 44 CLmode shooting speed 282 a Autofocus d5 Max continuous release 282 al AF C priority selection 267 d6 File number sequence 283 a2 AF S priority selection 268 d7 Shooting info display 284 a3 Dynamic AF area 269 d8 LCD illumination 285 a4 Focus tracking with lock on 270 49 Exposure delay mode 285 a5 AF activation 271 d0 MB D10 battery type 285 a6 AF point illumination 271 d Battery order 287 a7 Focus point wrap around 272 e Bracketing flash a8 AF point selection 272 el Flash sync speed 288 a9 Built in AF assist illuminator 273 e2 Flash shutter speed 291 a10 AF ON for MB D10 274 amp Flash cntrl for built in flash 291 b Metering exposure e4
51. ED e AF S 24 70mm f 2 8G e AF Micro 70 180mm f 4 5 5 6D ED AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D At ranges under 1 1m 3ft 7in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S DX VR 55 200mm f 4 5 6G ED At ranges under 1 5m 4ft 11in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S VR 70 300mm f 4 5 5 6G e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D e AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED e AF 80 200mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 2 3m 7ft 7in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF VR 80 400mm f 4 5 5 6D ED 355 356 Calculating Picture Angle The size of the area exposed by a 35 mm camera is 36 x 24 mm The size of the area exposed by the D300 in contrast is approximately 23 6 x 15 8 mm meaning that the diagonal picture angle of a 35 mm camera is approximately 1 5 times that of the D300 To calculate the focal length of lenses for the D300 in 35 mm format multiply the focal length of the lens by 1 5 for example the effective focal length of a 24 mm lens in 35 mm format would be 36 mm when mounted on the D300 Picture size 35 mm format 36 mm x 24 mm Picture diagonal Picture size D300 23 6 mm x 15 8 mm Picture angle 35 mm format Picture angle D300
52. L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 Note that some button press options can not be combined with options using dials The explanation that follows assumes that bracketing is assigned to the Fn button EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing Ea Choose the type of bracketing to be 5 Ea an performed using Custom Setting e5 oo Flash only Auto bracketing set pg 298 Choose PAA AE amp flash to vary both exposure and a flash level the default setting AE only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary only flash level 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel n Number of shots Control panel Fn button Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a Hai icon SIZ and exposure and flash bracketing PS 55 a TEN indicator will be displayed in the l control panel and a 4 icon will blink in the viewfinder 119 120 3 Select an exposure increment Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment LR Fn button ome dial Exposure increment 4 Control panel At default settings the size of the incre
53. Note that with the subjects listed on page 70 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark 6 on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark Release Mode Single Frame Continuous Live View Self Timer or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one at a time in a continuous sequence with the view through the lens displayed in the monitor with a timed shutter release delay fa or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration Choosing a Release MOde cscscesscsssssscscscsssscscceees pg 74 Continuous Modenie eena erene aeea pg 76 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View pg 79 Self Timer Mode eeen eee Ea eaae aeaa ts pg 91 Mirron p MO iiisicrcccscccescecsscnccecessoveseseessvensecccsecsececsscenes pg 93 73 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed CL While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous 1 6 frames per second Fra
54. OK 340 8 Preview the overlay gt Image overlay a Overlay Press A or W to highlight Overlay and press to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and CD Back Wave press To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain press 9 8 9 save the overlay Press while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be displayed full frame in the monitor m Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs created with the D300 can be selected for image overlay Other images are not displayed in the selection screen Only NEF RAW photographs with the same bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for Image 1 Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression 341 342 Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs BE Making a Side by Side Comparison 1 Selecta picture Use the multi selector to select a picture and press Only q retouched copies shown by a OA Ki icon
55. RAW bit depth 59 12 bit 59 14 bit 59 Type 58 Compressed 58 Lossless compressed 58 Uncompressed 58 Nikon Transfer 224 225 No memory card 310 Non CPU lens data 198 0 Optional flash 291 Overview data 216 P PC 227 Photo info 208 250 Photo info playback 302 PictBridge 231 413 Picture angle 356 Playback 53 205 folder 249 full frame 206 information 208 250 menu 246 slide show 252 thumbnail 218 zoom 220 Playback folder 249 Predictive 63 Print DPOF 236 Border 238 Page size 238 Start printing 238 Time stamp 238 Print options PictBridge Setup menu 234 Border 234 Cropping 235 No of copies 234 Page size 234 Start printing 235 Time stamp 234 Print select 236 Border 238 Page size 238 Start printing 238 Time stamp 238 Print set DPOF 230 Printing 230 Programmed auto 106 Protecting photographs 221 R Rear curtain sync 177 Red eye correction 335 Red eye reduction 176 Release button to use dial 309 Release mode 73 81 continuous 74 76 81 high speed 74 76 low speed 74 76 81 282 dial 75 lock release 75 live view 79 mirror up 93 self timer 91 single frame 74 Remote cord 89 93 368 Reset 184 257 266 397 Reset custom settings 266 Reset shooting menu 257 Reverse indicators 311 RGB 56 169 210 RGB Histogram 210 Rotate tall 251 S S 60 Save load settin
56. Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a 4 icon appears in the control panel SBA Control panel EN WB button Sub command dial Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the control panel Control panel WB button Sub command dial M Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu 135 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera pg
57. Select MTP PTP for the camera USB option before connecting a WT 4 wireless transmitter M Transfer Mode When Wireless transmitter gt Mode gt Transfer mode is selected in the camera setup menu the button is used during playback to select pictures for upload preventing it from being used to select pictures for other operations such as side by side comparison pg 342 To restore normal operation select another option for Wireless transmitter gt Mode WT 4A B C D E The principal difference between the WT 4 and WT 4A B C D E is in the number of channels supported unless otherwise stated all references to the WT 4 also apply to the WT 4A B C D E 229 Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods e Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera pg 231 e Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot see the printer manual for details If the printer supports DPOF pg 413 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 240 e Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center If the center supports DPOF pg 413 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 240 e Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network computer using the WT 4 wireless transmitter available separately see the WT 4 user s manual for details e
58. Setting a1 AF C priority selection pg 267 For information on using release priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 268 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a5 AF activation pg 271 63 AF Area Mode AF area mode determines how the focus point is selected in autofocus mode To select the AF area mode rotate the AF area mode selector The following options are available amp AF area mode selector Mode Description a User selects focus point manually camera focuses on Single subject in selected focus point only Use for relatively static compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus point AF point e In continuous servo AF pg 62 user selects focus point manually if subject briefly leaves selected focus point camera will focus based on information from surrounding tJ points Number of focus points used can be selected from Dynamic 9 21 and 51 using Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF areal area AF pg 269 If 51 points 3D tracking is selected for Custom Setting a3 focus point will be selected automatically using 3D tracking e Insingle servo AF user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Camera automatically detects subject and selects
59. Vista Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar and select Safely ey Remove Harha Remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears v Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon EE A arely Remove hardware E in the taskbar and select Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears Windows 2000 Professional Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon 5 in the taskbar and select Stop USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears MacOSX Drag the camera volume NIKON D300 into the Trash Unplug or Eject Hardware S 10 00 am NIKON D300 Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select mode upload Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network computer Transfer mode PC mode Print mode For more information see the WT 4 user s manual M uss
60. a 1005 segment RGB sensor Use a type Gor Dlens for results that include range information 3D color matrix metering Il see page 352 for information on lens types With other CPU lenses 3D range information is not included color matrix metering Il Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non CPU lens are specified using Non CPU lens data item in setup menu see page 199 center weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center weighted metering see Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 277 For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 277 103 PN ial 104 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure Four modes are available programmed auto F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A and manual M Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for Programmed Paine optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots i pg 106 and in other situations in which there is little time p9 to adjust camera settings Shutter priority User chooses shutter speed camera selects 5 auto aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur pg 108 motion User
61. according to subject status e Manual M Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF dynamic area AF automatic area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button Flash Built in flash Manual pop up with button release and a Guide Number of 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 12 39 or 18 59 in manual mode m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 13 43 409 410 Flash Flash control e TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using 1 005 segment RGB sensor are available with built in flash and SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 e Auto aperture Available with SB 800 and CPU lens e Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 800 28 27 and 22s e Range priority manual Available with SB 800 Flash mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync Flash compensation 3 1 EV in increments of 3 2 or 1 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when built in flash or Speedlight such as SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DxX or SB 50DxX is fully charged blinks after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe Standard ISO 518 hot shoe contact with safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Light
62. almost anywhere in the frame single point and dynamic amp AF area mode selector area AF or automatically auto area AF note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto area AF is selected To select the focus point manually 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point SSS al to Focus selector lock 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point At default settings the center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus all ofS 25 56 A 200i 37 point from changing when the multi selector is pressed See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a6 AF point illumination pg 271 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a7 Focus point wrap around pg 272 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a8 AF point selection pg 272 For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 301
63. and image options appear in photo information display Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting Option Description On Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting Off default Pictures can only be displayed by pressing P button After Delete Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description Show next default Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame previous picture will be displayed Show Md previous Display previous picture If deleted picture was first frame following picture will be displayed before Continueas If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display in the camera monitor Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically On rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation pg 318 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in default
64. and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 1 250 s When the camera 1 250 Auto FP shows a ne speed of 1 250 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s 1 250 s default Flash sync speed set to 1 250 s 1 200 s Flash sync speed set to 1 200 s 1 160 s Flash sync speed set to 1 160 s 1 125 s Flash sync speed set to 1 125 s 1 100 s Flash sync speed set to 1 100 s 1 80 s Flash sync speed set to 1 80 s 1 60 s Flash sync speed set to 1 60 s Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field 288 Flash Control at 1 320 s Auto FP When 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 the built in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1 320 s while optional SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units can be used at any shutter speed Auto FP High Speed Sync Flash syncspeed 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250
65. and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel Control panel WB butto Main command dial 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then ETA press the button until the PRE icon in ae Jar Feil the control panel and viewfinder start Control panel to flash A flashing will also appear Ly in the control panel and viewfinder At JEA Ins default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds vigwnnagr 4 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the ELN reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 5 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel while the viewfinder will show a flashing a At default settings the displays will flash Control panel for about six seconds Vly D e a LEN Viewfinder 139 140 If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing no fd will appear in the control panel and viewfinder at default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Press the shutter re
66. are recorded Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down M Auto Image Rotation In continuous mode pg 74 the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all photographs in the same burst even if camera orientation is changed during shooting Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 251 USB Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge printer Choose MTP PTP the default setting when connecting to a PictBridge printer or an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter or when using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately see page 367 See page 225 for information on selecting a USB option for use with Nikon Transfer Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX available separately for more information see the Capture NX manual Dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 319 1 Choose astart option GS Dust off ref photo Highlight one of the following E options and pres
67. before putting the battery away Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended 379 Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if
68. brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 1 ISO Sensitivity i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 or under 200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings Using the Built in Flash Follow these steps when using the built in flash 1 Choosea metering method pg Metering selector 102 Select matrix or center weighted metering to activate i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging When the flash is fully charged the flash ready indicator 4 will light 3 Choose a flash mode Press the button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode icon is displayed in the control panel pg 176 Main command dial Control panel 173 174 4 Check exposure shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter release button halfway and check shutter speed and aperture The settings available when the built in flash is raised are listed below
69. button is pressed halfway or any of the MODE E4 ISO QUAL or WB button is pressed Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter is used setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off 309 310 f9 No Memory Card At the default setting of Enable release the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option 10 Reverse Indicators At the default setting of hetinisnininiee 07 the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select iiitininteth 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right 311 T The Setup Menu Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below For information on using the setup menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Option See page
70. channel TTL TTL Channel 294 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in E e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash fl h Commander mode ash ae Mode Comp Y Built in flash 0 78 Choose the flash control mode and Stade P A T Group output level for the built in flash Note Channel E that output level can not be adjusted in Eho net Ok mode 2 Adjust settings for group A i e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Choose the flash control mode and 6 Mode Comp ae W Built in flash output level for the flash units in group ERI EF i Group B ol A Channel Ba Move Set ONOK 3 Adjust settings for group B E Flash ent for builtin flash Commander mode kd Mode Comp Choose the flash control mode and RS output level for the flash units in group ERIZ P Group B M E 1 46 B Channel cH Move _ Set__ QHOK 4 Select the channel i e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode ae Mode Comp W Built in flash Ed Group A E Group B M Channel 3 RU Move Set WOK 5 Press 295 296 10 m 33 ft 30 aa Compose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions Wireless remote 60 or less r 5m 15ft or sensors on flash or les
71. chooses aperture camera selects shutter Aperture Sue speed for best results Use to blur background for A priority auto pg 109 portraits or bring both foreground and background into focus for landscape shots User controls both shutter speed and aperture Manual ON F M og 111 Set shutter speed to tus tb for long time p9 exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring pg 352 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode A is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder To choose the exposure mode press the MODE MODE button button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Main command dial Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and hold Preview button the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes F and 5 or the value chosen by the user modes f and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Custom Setting e4 Modeling Flash
72. fluorescent 6 500 Use under daylight fluorescent lights Use under high color temperature High temp mercury an las anor 7 200 light sources e g mercury vapor P lamps 3 Direct sunlight 5 200 Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight Color temp Option K Description 4 Flash 5 400 Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 Use in daylight under overcast skies f Shade 8 000 Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list 10 000 of values pg 135 Use subject light source or existing PRE Preset manual photograph as reference for white balance pg 136 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance I Choose color temp White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel m m Control panel WB button Main command dial The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in the shooting menu pg 254 gt Fluorescent Selecting fluorescent with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in
73. gt eee g Copy to card 3 Select a Picture Control E Manage Picture Control E Copy to camera Highlight a custom Picture _ oo Control and either f A E ia e press gt to view current i Picture Control settings or Nv GB Grid CConfirm e press to proceed to Step 4 PENEN a Y ic Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue Grid Done s Sharpening 4 Select a destination ey Manage Picture Control Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt ECS Unused FACT Unused 5 Name the Picture Control Name the Picture Control as described fy Set Picture Control on page 158 The new Picture Control ED ta will appear in the Picture Control list and can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu 2 STANDARD 02 Grid GAdiust ey Manage Picture Control Le Y Save edit Delete L Load save 161 BE Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select Copy to card F Manage Picture Control E Load save After displaying the Load __ s save menu as described in E ENAN Step 1 on page 160 highlight Copy to card and press Nv a 2 Select a Picture Control E Manage Picture Control 10 Copy to card Highlight a custom Picture n P ae aj Control and press gt 3 Choose a destination Manage Picture Control ao Choose destination Choose a destination from slots
74. improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The battery may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL3e battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Refer to the page numbers in the right most column for more information HE Display Problem Solution Page Adjust viewfinder focus or
75. is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNX and Capture NX available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D300 Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash This chapter describes how to use the built in flash TheBuilt in Flas Weastecccccccsesacscsccsscecscsscacecscesecsncecsccscossee pg 172 Using the Built in Flash s ssesesessessossoscssoscsscscssesessesee pg 173 FlasShiMOGeS eave cscccsssecoseccecsecste
76. is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing The following shooting menu options will also be reset Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 255 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG Normal White balance Auto Image size Large ISO sensitivity 200 Fine tuning off If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored See Also See page 397 for a list of default settings 185 186 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s 1 Select Multiple exposure F SHOOTING MENU Color space SRGB y Active D Lighting OFF Long exp NR OFF Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting menu and press gt _ High ISO NR OFF EA 150 sensitivity settings 8 Live view 8 oF E Inter
77. latch clicks into place M The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths of 18 300 mm pg 354 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses If the flash fires in continuous release mode pg 76 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause See Also See page 180 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed pg 291 For information on using the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 See page 357 for information on using optional flash units For information on the range of the built in flash see page 405 175 Flash Modes The D300 supports the following flash modes Flash mode Description Front curtain This mode is recommended for most situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed will automatically be set to
78. list IC Monochrome FG V1V1D 02 ro e CN GAdiust Custom Picture Controls can be renamed jS qEREEEmen at any time using the Rename optionin the Manage Picture Control menu Savel it Load save Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are not affected by Reset shooting menu pg 257 Custom Picture Controls do not have a Quick adjust option pg 153 Custom Picture Controls based on Monochrome have Filter effects and Toning options in place of Saturation and Hue controls The Original Picture Control Icon The Nikon Picture Control on which the custom Original Picture Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon Control icon in the top right corner of the edit display Y Contrast EA Brightness Saturation Hue eCrid COOK WReset 159 160 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software BE Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select Load save E Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control et menu highlight Load save f Awa ame and press gt i A toad save p 2 Select Copy to camera E Manage Picture Control 10 Load save Highlight Copy to camera and _ 7 press
79. main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and m is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 184 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated Exposure and Flash Bracketing In single frame and self timer modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode When On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitiv
80. mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended 1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Mup Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror Frame the picture focus and then press C the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror v Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus metering and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised 3 Takea picture y Press the shutter release button all the lt i way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord pg 368 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised 93 p 94 ISO Sensitivity Reacting Faster to Light ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually sssscsceeesees pg 96 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ssesessessossosossoscssoscsscscsse pg
81. of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device ina carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs 377 378 Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to nor
82. of 24 105 mm the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide active AF assist illumination for the following focus points 24 34mm AF lens 35 49 mm AF lens o0000 00000 00000 oO 00000 00000 00000 a 50 105 mm AF lens oo oo 00000 361 362 In programmed auto the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 5 5 6 7 1 8 10 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon Speedl
83. on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http nikonimaging com XxiV Introduction This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts OVENI EW fcksccscsceccosccsesdoctcssessesctesstostesecssencectasescestasseasentecertest Getting to Know the Camera sssssoscsscscsscssssesesseseoseosos GaimeraiBodyceieecssrcssteste crociacerema tier evsercetresscerereerra tar mcrae The Control Panel Teraa E EEEE The Viewfinder Display The Shooting Information Display The command Dials o ecsear eceran e Quick Start Guide eenean E E Overview
84. option is selected for the USB item in the camera setup menu pg 225 2 Turn the camera off Power switch 3 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 4 connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 5 Turn the camera on Power switch If Mass Storage is selected for USB pg 225 PE will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder and the PC mode indicator will flash in the control panel camera displays do not change if MTP PTP is selected 6 Transfer photographs Transfer photographs to the computer as described in the online help for Nikon Transfer To view the online help start Nikon Transfer and select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu m During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress 227 228 7 Turn the camera off If MTP PTP is selected for USB the camera can be turned off and the USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete If Mass Storage is selected the camera must first be removed from the system as described below Windows
85. or SB R200 flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting Selecting this option displays the menu ES c3 Flash cntrl for builtin flash shown at right Press lt or to highlightthe p iiiu jode omp following options A or W to change Built in flash O Ed Group A ol fe Group B ol Channel Ba Move Set WOK Option Description Built in PA flash Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire but the AF assist illuminator lights The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Auto aperture available only with SB 800 flash units Choose AA flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Grouse Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options p available are the same as those listed for Group A above Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same
86. order pg 300 MTR gt under gt over 400 Option Default Multi selector center button pg 301 Shooting mode Select center focus point Playback mode Thumbnail on off f2 Multi selector pg 302 Do nothing f3 Photo info playback pg 302 Info Playback gt Assign FUNC button pg 303 f4 FUNC button press None FUNC button dials Auto bracketing Assign preview button pg 306 f5 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 f6 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None Customize command dials pg 308 Reverse rotation pg 308 No f7 Change main sub pg 308 Off Aperture setting pg 308 Sub command dial Menus and playback pg 309 Off f8 Release button to use dial pg 309 No f9 No memory card pg 310 Enable release f10 Reverse indicators pg 311 hehiiniiis 401 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme III SDCFX card at different image quality and size settings Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless compressed 12 bit e 13 6 MB 28 13 NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14
87. rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject and background Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 177 178 Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3 EV to 1 EV in increments of 3EV changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel In general choose YIS positive values to make the main EN subject brighter negative values 7 button Sub command to make it darker dial At values other than 0 a Ei icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the E button i The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the pes eser e ooh oND 0 EV 24 button Normal flash output can be restored by pressed setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash jes 55 e4 aah compensation is not reset when the camera S 0 3 EV is turned off a D 1 0 EV Optional Flash Units Flash compensation is also available with optional SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine
88. set DPOF D Select set ARA 100 2 100 3 4 Wa Set Zoom CHOK To view the highlighted picture full Q button screen press and hold the amp button wa Print set DPOF y DSC_0001 JPG 15 12 2007 10 15 29 2 Press the center of the ia Print set DPOF multi selector to select the p highlighted picture io Kom EA 3 024 Selected pictures are marked J oF jm by an icon When selecting ane pictures for printing press the Om button and press A or V to choose the number of copies 247 248 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a picture highlight it and press center of multi selector 4 Press to complete the operation Delete button Print set DPOF Wl Select set Done o Data imprint c Imprint date ic e Select this option to delete pictures Protected and hidden images will not be deleted Option Description i Selected Delete selected pictures All Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback pg 249 Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback Option Description ND300 Pictures in all folders created with the D300 will be default visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible Current during playback Hide Imag
89. the shooting menu offers the following bit depth options for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit default 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits producing files roughly 1 3 times larger than 12 bit files but increasing the color data recorded Maximum frame advance rate pg 77 falls to 2 5 fps bit 14 bit NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in software such as Capture NX available separately or ViewNX supplied NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images 59 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from the following options Option Size pixels Size when printed at 200 dpi approx L default 4 288 x 2 848 54 5 x 36 2 cm 21 4 x 14 2 in M 3 216 x 2 136 40 8 x 27 1 cm 16 1 x 10 7 in S 2 144 x 1 424 27 2 x 18 1 cm 10 7 x 7 1 in Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Print size decreases as printer resolution increases Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired option is displayed in the control panel The Image Size Menu A VS N QUAL button Sub command dial
90. tunel pg 275 179 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button E 4 Assion FUNC button FUNC button press Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4 r ali ml Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button ia press pg 303 pe E m AF lock only Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging Flash pop up button 180 Focus Position the subject in the _ center of the frame and press v the shutter release button oc halfway to focus 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to i determine the appropriate flash level Fn button Bo F35 C 3 om Flash output will be locked at this level F and FV lock icons em will appearinthe control panel and viewfinder ag qm mA 54 CACEN 5 Recompose the photograph 6 Takethe photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures ca
91. twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 ISO sensitivity 400 800 1600 3200 Multiply GN by 1 4 2 2 8 e2 Flash Shutter Speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s the default setting to 30 s 30 s e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description T4 TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to default shooting conditions M Manual Choose the flash level pg 292 RPT Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open flash producing a strobe light effect pg 293 C Commander Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling mode one or more remote optional flash units pg 294 Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached E 3 Optional flash and turned on Custom Setting e3 changes t
92. with ISO sensitivity auto control on pg 277 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached BE Shooting Data Page 2 AUTO 0 0 sRGB STANDARD QUICK ADJUST SHARPENING CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SATURATION HUE COCCOWO 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 Protect Status esses 221 7 Sharpening 153 2 Retouch indicator 329 PRB ContraSt ssesecsesssoosesossoosssossoosesss 153 3 White balance esses 127 9 BrightMess ee sseessccssseesseeneee 153 Color temperature seeesseee 135 10 Saturation 4 153 White balance fine tuning 131 Filter effects 5 eeessssssecesseesssseeeeee 153 Preset MANUAL srssserreseseenenees 136 BR Huet ican iiittancninndieanntene 153 4 Color SPACE eeessscsssscsseessesesessnsees 169 TONING sissssecscsetssicsacccscessetetnesnbosses 153 5 Picture Control ou eeesessseseceeeeee 150 12 Camera name 6 Quick adjust Zo eeccscsssseseceeseee 153 13 Folder number Original Picture Control 3 150 frame NUMBbETr ssssssssssesssessesreessees 258 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 250 2 Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only 3 Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls CE 4 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls 5 Monochrome Picture Controls only 213 EE Shooting Data Page 3 3 T dubs REDUC H1 ISO NORM p ACT D LIGHT NORMAL D LIGH
93. 0 press gt a 103ND300 2 Highlight a folder Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder M Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures ora picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Number of Folders Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders 259 File Naming Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see steps 2 and 3 of Renaming Shooting Menu Banks pg 256 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIF
94. 1 Se Keeping the O n button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected 4 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Start printing Page size Border Time stamp 237 5 Adjust printing options zi Setu Press A or to highlight an Ea arain option and press gt to select K N Border Time stamp Option Description Menu of page size options will be displayed pg 234 Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of border options will be displayed pg 234 Press A or F to choose print style from Printer default Border default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of time stamp options will be displayed pg 234 Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu Page size Time stamp 6 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing WZ To ca
95. 1 Select PRE Preset White balance manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg KI Choose color temp 128 and press P Xe aetna 2 Select a destination is White balance Le Highlight the destination FE A N y preset d 1 to d 4 and press Rya the center of the multi rs selector Xv BRS 3 Copy d 0 to the selected fej White balance preset 1G Preset manual a 4 g Set Highlight Copy d 0 and l Edit comment press If comment has CE been created for d 0 pg 146 DS the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset 141 142 BE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 128 and press gt i White balance Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash erg I ty Shade KI Choose color temp 2 Preset manual 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector i White balance i FRA d 0 d 2 PRE Select Set 3 Choose Select image Highlight Select image and press b gt ey White balance Preset manual y d1 Set Edit comm
96. 2 pe 4103 MONOCHROME 02 1 through 99 and press to a i E 105 Unused save the selected Picture ae Control to the memory card C107 Unused Any Picture Controls that may already have been saved to the selected slot will be overwritten Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card 162 Managing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls EE Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select Rename In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Rename and press gt E Manage Picture Control Le Save edit Y Delete R Load save Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt Manage Picture Control Gy Rename EECV IV ID 02 2 y ate STANDARD 02 te Rename the Picture Control Rename the Picture Control as described on page 256 E Rename 1 Sha 4 10123456789 lt gt 7 BBCDEFGHIJKL MNOPORSTUVWXYZ I 2Cursor lnput ONOK 163 EE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select Delete i Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control Eo menu highlight Delete and pg press
97. 278 P Programmed auto 106 5 Shutter priority auto 108 A Aperture priority auto 109 M Manual 111 Help 24 29 r Memory buffer 51 PRE Preset manual 129 136 Numerics 1 005 segment RGB sensor 128 3D color matrix metering II 103 3D tracking 64 270 A AC adapter 364 Accessories 364 Active D Lighting 167 Active folder 258 AE L 69 114 307 AF 62 64 66 70 AF activation 271 AF area brackets 43 84 AF assist 51 273 355 AF fine tune 327 AF point illumination 271 AF point selection 272 AF area mode 64 auto area AF 64 65 dynamic area AF 64 65 269 single point AF 64 65 AF C priority selection 267 AF ON button 63 86 AF On for MB D10 274 AF S priority selection 268 After delete 251 A M switch 34 Amber 132 338 Aperture 109 112 maximum 72 198 minimum 35 104 Aperture priority auto 109 Assign AE L AF L button 307 Assign FUNC button 303 Assign preview button 306 Auto bracketing 118 298 299 Auto bracketing Mode M 299 Auto bracketing set 298 AE amp flash 298 AE only 298 Flash only 298 WB bracketing 298 Auto FP high speed sync 288 289 357 Auto image rotation 318 Auto meter off 46 279 Auto meter off delay 279 Auto area AF 64 65 Autofocus 62 64 66 70 B Backlight 46 285 Battery 30 32 44 285 287 322 charging 30 pack 285 287 323 364 Battery info 322 Batt
98. 29 White balance 123 128 bracketing 123 preset manual 129 136 Wireless 229 364 network 229 364 transmitter 229 364 Wireless transmitter 229 World time 37 316 Date and time 37 316 Date format 38 316 Daylight saving time 37 316 Time zone 37 316 WT 4 229 364 421 Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION NIKON CORPORATION Fuji Bldg 2 3 Marunouchi 3 chome Printed in Thailand Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8331 Japan 6MBO00111 01
99. 3 Ethernet 229 364 EV steps for exposure cntrl 275 Exif version 2 21 170 413 Exp comp fine tune 275 Exposure 101 102 114 116 lock 114 meters 46 279 mode 104 aperture priority auto 109 manual 111 programmed auto 106 shutter priority auto 108 program 404 Exposure bracketing 118 298 299 Exposure compensation 116 Exposure delay mode 285 F File information 209 File naming 260 File number sequence 283 Filter effects 338 Skylight 338 Warm filter 338 Fine tune optimal exposure 277 Firmware version 328 417 418 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Flash 173 176 178 180 bracketing 118 298 299 compensation 178 control 172 357 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 172 357 standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 172 mode 176 modeling 105 298 monitor pre flash 172 181 range 290 405 ready indicator 92 173 181 sync speed 108 288 289 sync terminal 363 Flash cntrl for built in flash 291 Commander mode 294 Manual 292 Repeating flash 293 Flash shutter speed 291 Flash sync speed 288 Flexible program 107 Fn button 119 123 181 303 f number 109 110 352 Focal length 198 354 Focal length scale 35 Focal plane mark 72 Focus 61 62 64 66 68 71 autofocus 62 64 66 70 contrast detect 80 88 phase detection 80 electronic range finding 72 84 indicator 51 72 lock 68 m
100. 6 s 2001547 4 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU F56 e0047 5 Check the view in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x and check focus press the amp button Q button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor Press to exit zoom Autofocus focus mode S or In tripod mode the focus point for contrast detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the frame using the multi selector To focus using contrast detect autofocus press the AF 0N button The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus using contrast detect autofocus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red Manual focus focus mode M pg 71 Use zoom for precise focus 87 p 88 6 Takethe picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way H down to take the pi
101. 79 93 374 1 AF assist illuminator 273 Self timer lamp eeeeeseeeeeseeeeeee 92 Red eye reduction lamp 176 2 Sub command dial eeeoe 14 3 Depth of field preview FUTON ssecddscheadasnsctecsdccaesdeons 105 306 4 Fn button 119 123 181 303 5 Battery chamber covet 32 6 Battery chamber cover VAC ssssssssssiscnsnsssosnensssscoencnsesnneovassensce 32 7 Contact cover for optional MB D10 battery pack 364 8 CPU contacts 9 Mounting index essen 10 LENS MOUNT ecsecstecstecneeeee 11 Tripod socket 12 Body cap Camera Body Continued A Ny 6 _We He 112 10 1 Viewfinder eyepiece 43 2 DK 23 viewfinder eyepiece CUp sssssssssssssssssesseeccscese 20 3 t delete button 54 222 nim format DUTTON 41 4 gt playback button 53 206 5 MONitOr cesses 53 79 206 6 MENU menu button 24 245 7 Om protect button sss 221 help button INFO button sssssssssssssssessssssss 12 8 9E thumbnail playback zoom out button uu 218 9 amp playback zoom in DUTTON ve ecceecsesssesseesseessessseestesseesses 220 10 OK button Lu eecsesssseessessees 28 1 Diopter adjustment control 43 2 Metering selector 103 fet AE AF lock U
102. All for Playback folder 249 playback e Select On for Rotate tall 251 Tall i e Photo was taken with Off selected 318 toy ets for Auto image rotation are displ a in e Camera orientation was changed 77 ne ae o while shutter release button was rientation P pressed in continuous release mode e Camera was pointed up or down 318 when photo was taken Can not delete photo Photo is protected remove protection 221 Message is displayed ee oe ieee Select All for Playback folder 249 for playback Can not change print ordet Memory card is full delete photos 45 Ehn not celectohoto Photo is in NEF RAW format Transfer P to computer and print using supplied 230 for printing software or Capture NX Problem Solution Page e Set USB to MTP PTP 319 e NEF RAW and TIFF photos can notbe 230 printed by direct USB connection Use Can not print photos DPOF print service TIFF images only or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX Photo is not displayed on TV Choose correct video mode 314 Photo is not displayed on high Confirm that HDMI cable available Neate i 244 definition video separately is connected device Cannot copy photos Choose correct USB option 225 to computer Photos niot displayed Update software to latest version 367 in Capture NX Can not use Camera Control Pro 2 Set USB to MTP PTP 225 HE Misce
103. B R200 TTL ors vyivlwivilvlvlvliy AA Auto aperture WA J f RP wy w A Non TTL auto ve I 5 GN Range priority manual M Manual Y Y Y Y Y Yv Y Yv RPT Repeating flash Yv vY Vv Vv Y Auto FP High Speed Sync Y v vY Vv Y vv FV lock Y vY vi vY Vv Y v v AF assist for multi areaAF Yv i i vY Vv ee Flash Color Information v v v v Communication REAR Rear curtain sync Y Y Y Y Y Yv Vv Vv Red eye reduction Vv Vv Vv Vv Auto zoom Vv Y i v Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data NO Selected with flash unit Select 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 8 CPU lens required 359 Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock
104. B bracketing indicatot 123 27 Electronic analog exposure displays msn 113 Exposure compensation 116 Exposure and flash bracketing progress ate Ner Ee E A EEES 119 WB bracketing progress indicato segi 123 PC connection indicatov 227 28 MB D10 battery indicator 364 29 Multiple exposure indicator inana 188 30 GPS connection indicator 202 31 Interval timer indicator 194 The Viewfinder Display 2 000 0000 p000 OU 000i 00000 00000 o0000 00000 OCG z 000 10 1 Framing grid displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d2 281 2 FOCUS POINTS eseeseeseeeee 66 272 3 AF area brackets wo 43 84 4 Battery indicato 44 282 display can be turned off with Custom Setting d3 5 Focus indicator 51 72 6 Metering essecsescssesssesseeseeees 102 7 Autoexposure AE lock 114 8 Shutter speed 108 111 9 Aperture f number 109 111 Aperture number Of stops sseeeceeeees 353 10 Exposure mode 11 Flash compensation INdICAtOT oe eessoeecsssseecsssescccnsecesnees 178 12 Exposure compensation INdICAtOT oe eesseeesssssecccssecccnsecessees 116 13 ISO sensitivity 0 eesescseeccneeene 96 M No Battery 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
105. Bracketing Order At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN bracketing is performed in the order described on pages 120 and 124 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value 300 f Controls f1 Multi Selector Center Button This option determines what operations can be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting and playback modes BE Shooting Mode Selecting Shooting mode displays the following options Option Description Select center RESET focus point default Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode selects the center focus point Highlight active Pressing the center of the multi selector in SEDE focus point shooting mode highlights the active focus point Pressing the center of the multi selector has Not used no effect when the camera is in shooting mode EE Playback Mode Selecting Playback mode displays the following options Option Description Thumbnail Press the center of the multi selector to toggle on off between full frame and thumbnail playback default x In both full frame and thumbnail playback a View SET histograms histogram is displayed while the center of the multi selector is pressed Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and Zoomon playback zoom Choose the
106. CONN ss sictscsasascssaeasesaanes 68 69 307 4 AF ON AF ON button 63 86 5 Main command dial n s 14 6 Multi selectOf sssssssssessessssssssssss 26 7 Focus selector lOCK ccsseeces 66 8 Memory card slot covert 39 9 Memory card access ANT o E EEEE 40 52 10 AF area mode selector 64 11 Card slot cover latch 39 The Control Panel 1 Color temperature indicator 135 2 Shutter speed 0 108 111 Exposure compensation WANS ccs csssssssssssccaniazscasasssceasteshcassintess 116 Flash compensation value 178 ISO SENSITIVITY ees eesseeessseessseessnee 96 White balance fine tuning 132 Color temperature 134 White balance preset NUMBER iiinn 145 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing SEGUENCE sisssscaieniasssascasctstasiaviensdieise 119 Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence 123 Number of intervals for interval timer photography sssssssssssssesssssrrsssesresss 194 Focal length non CPU lenses ees 3 Flash sync indicator s 288 4 Flexible program indicator 107 5 Exposure Mode seseesccssesceesseeees 104 ME MAJE SIZE sscisacscosessicentacastiserossscensicces 60 7 8 12 13 Image quality on ssesscsseescenseesees 57 Auto area AF indicator 64 AF area mode indicator 3D tracking indicator 64 270 White balance fine tuning WING
107. D 18mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in 20 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D ED 18mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S DX 18 135mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX VR 18 200 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 20 35mm f 2 8D 20 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 28mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in RES ee 8G 35mm 1 0m 3ft 3in 28 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED 35 mm 1 0m 3 ft 3in When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges The built in flash can also be used with AI S Al and Al modified non CPU lenses with a focal length of 18 300mm Al 50 300mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300mm f 4 5 and Al S 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 135mm or above and Al 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 105mm or above 354 m Red Eye Reduction Lenses that block the subject s view of the AF assist illuminator may interfere with red eye reduction M AF Assist Illumination AF assist illumination is not available with the following lenses e AF S VR 200mm f 2G e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED At ranges under 0 7m 2ft 4in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF Micro 200mm f 4D ED e AF S 17 55mm f 2 8G e AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G
108. E FUNC Button Press Selecting FUNC button press for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field pg 105 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash FV lock and SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only pg 180 Press again to cancel FV lock i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed Wa AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed AE lock ME Reset on release Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off AE lock mS Hold Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off a AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed Flash off The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed 303 304 Option Description If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If white balance bracketing is active or BKT Bracketing continuous release mode mode CH or CL is burst A selected the camera wi
109. F RGB images JPG for JPEG images and NDF for dust off reference data Image Quality Choose image quality pg 56 Image Size Choose the size at which pictures are recorded pg 60 JPEG Compression Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary file size for improved image quality pg 58 260 NEF RAW Recording Choose compression and bit depth options for NEF RAW images pg 58 White Balance Adjust white balance settings pg 128 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings pg 148 Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card pg 156 Color Space Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces pg 169 Active D Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows pg 167 The default setting is Off 261 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s are processed to reduce noise While m yn photographs are being C Jap Hi processed jab ar will blink in the shutter speed aperture On displays for a period of time approximately equal to the current shutter speed In continuous release mode fram
110. F different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial flexible program Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off D bo F5 ma BGA un me ka NORM Shutter speed 2 500 s Shutter speed 1 60 S Aperture f 2 8 Aperture f 22 See Also See page 404 for information on the built in exposure program 107 108 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Select exposure mode 5 Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until 5 is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Main command dial 2 Choose a shutter speed Rotate
111. I OCursor lnput OK Image Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue using Picture Controls how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D Lighting and how to choose a color space PICCUPE Controls lt c s cccccscccecsssucesusstcsesstsesececsssccseevessesss Creating Custom Picture Controls Active D Lighting aeetos erete rattas rtre Area renta Eol CN o F L A E L A A 147 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings or make independent adjustments to sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software and software created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system 148 BE Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as described below e Select Nikon Picture Controls pg 150 Select an existing Nikon Picture Control e Modify existing Picture Controls pg 152 Modify an existing Pic
112. ICACOF siisii iii 134 White balance sssssssssssssessssessessssss 129 Number of exposures FEMA G sanina a 45 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills Capture mode indicatov Preset white balance recording indicator s s 139 Manual lens numbet 0 200 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 E XPOSUTES ssaisecsasscsssssasesteacestesseasescesst 45 Battery indicator sesser 44 Ee ABCD MER 14 Flash Me ssesscsssssccsteeeeeees 173 15 Beep indicator essences 281 16 Aperture f number 109 111 Aperture number Of stops sesecseccseeeees 353 Exposure and flash bracketing increment 0 120 WB bracketing increment 124 Number of shots per interval siisii 194 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses wv 200 PC mode indicator 227 17 Aperture stop indicatot 353 18 Flash compensation Indicato aiiis 178 19 Exposure compensation indicator 116 20 ISO sensitivity indicatot 96 Auto ISO sensitivity TWAGIG ALON ssicnsieslcccctiscossasscssdaccoetstectoeese 98 21 FV lock indicator seeessesseeseeees 181 22 Clock not set indicator 38 388 1 A USTIMABCD EK 24 25 23 Image comment indicator 317 24 Shooting menu bank Be 25 Custom settings bank 26 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 119 W
113. KKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR 2 e AF S 500mm f 4D ED II e AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR 2 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus not supported when used with TC 17E II TC 20 E II teleconverter Compatible Non CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 198 many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non CPU lenses If lens data are not specified color matrix metering can not be used and center weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes FA and M when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non CPU lens data the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring Aperture priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and 5 The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder 353 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18 300mm Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Lens Zoom position Min range AF S DX 12 24mm f 4G E
114. Modeling flash 298 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 275 5 Auto bracketing set 298 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 275 Auto bracketing Mode M 299 b3 Exp comp fine tune 275 7 Bracketing order 300 b4 Easy exposure compensation 276 f Controls b5 Center weighted area 277 fl Multi selector center button 301 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 277 f2 Multi selector 302 c Timers AE lock f3 Photo info playback 302 cl Shutter release button AE L 279 f4 Assign FUNC button 303 a Auto meter off delay 279 f5 Assign preview button 306 G Self timer delay 280 f6 Assign AE L AF L button 307 c4 Monitor off delay 280 f7 Customize command dials 308 d Shooting display f8 Release button to use dial 309 d1 Beep 281 f No memory card 310 d2 Viewfinder grid display 281 _f10 Reverse indicators 311 d3 Viewfinder warning display 282 265 266 C Custom Setting Bank Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate ba
115. NIKON D300 LATITUDE oN 1035 36 371 LONGITUDE EE LSD 139 43 696 ALTITUDE 35m P 1 125 F5 6 200 35mm ree Sey HEADING 105 07 3 Dao oo sB ESD n Zee 100ND300 _ DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 100ND300 _ DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007_10 15 29 4288x2848 15 12 2007 _10 75 29 4288x2848 NIKON D300 File Information Overview Data GPS Data ia E8 Select R G B E RGB Histogram olo 0 0 NTR SPD AP ax gt EXP NODE I 50 0 WHITE BAL E EXP T NI N FOCAL LENGTH LENS UTO shee CONTRAST fs FLASH ODE 2 BRIGHTNESS lt mie i a ASAD aa NIKON D300 100 1 Shooting Data page 1 Shooting Data page 2 Shooting Data page 3 208 BE File Information i 12 11 10 9 1 Protect Status woes 8 Image quality oe esessssseeecees 56 2 Retouch indicator 9 IMAGE SIZE oeeecssseccssesccseeceeeteeeee 60 3 Image highlights N 10 Image authentication 324 4 FOCUS point 2 cesseccssssescccessesees 11 Time of recording seeceeseseeeee 36 5 AF area brackets secsseee 12 Date of recording 36 6 Frame number 13 Folder NAME csseesssscsseeeseeessesees 258 total number of frames 14 Highlight display indicator 250 7 File MAM C eessseseccsseecceseeesseeeeeee 260 1 Image highlights areas of the frame that may be overexposed are indicated by a flashing border Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mod
116. NO Memory Card ecsssscssssssccsssscesseecssusecesssececnseessneeecesneees 310 10 Reverse INGICAtOMS ccssssssssssssssessesssesssesssessessseessesssesseess 311 Y The Setup Menu Camera Setup cccssscssssscssesssssssssssssesessees 312 Format Memory Card sssssssssssscsssessecssecssseseccsseesesnsecssneeesees 313 LCD Brightin ss sssscsssssscssesscssssccsssscecsseccesuseccsneecesssecssneeeeees 313 Clean Image SQNSOL ssssccsssecsssseccsseecssuseccsneseeentecssseeeeesseees 314 Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning ssssescssseccssseccsseescensecesseeeseee 314 Video MOE ssssessssesseteceesees Dust off Ref Photo a Battery No sanninna niia Wireless Transmitter ssssessssssssssssssossoesccooreessesssssssssssssssssessseee 323 Non CPU Lens Data AF Fine Tune 00 3 Firmware Version sssssssssssssessssseeeesssssssssosereseeeeessssssssseeereeeee 328 amp The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 329 DLIIRN Geass ccssssusshsscsbassascosectcosssesvnascarcnscgeasviazeastees 334 Red Eye Correction Color Balan E a r a RENE Image Overlay Side by Side Comparison ssesscssescesseecesseceesecssnetecssneees 342 i My Menu Creating a Custom M NU s ssssssssssssssessssesssssssress 344 xvi Technical Notes 349 Compatible Lenses ou esesssssssssssccssccssscccssccessecessecsssecssseesnscesnscessees 350 Optional Flash Units Speedlights ssssss
117. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA D300 User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from Q The Q amp A Index pp iv ix Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Table of Contents pp x xvii Find items by function or menu name The Quick Start Guide pp 21 22 A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away The Index pp 416 421 Search by key word Error Messages pp 388 395 If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting pp 381 387 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety pg xviii Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately e D300 digital camera pg 3 e Body cap pp 34 367 e BM 8 LCD monitor cover pg 19 e DK 5 eyepiece cap pg 20 e EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery with terminal cover pp 30 32 e MH 18a quick charger with power cable pg 30 e UC E4 USB cable pp 224 232 e EG D100 video cable pg 242 e AN D300 strap pg 19 e Warranty e User s Man
118. Number of exposures TOMAINING seessecseecsscsseesseeseesseese 45 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 77 White balance recording TNGICATON 0 seesessssesccsseecesseeceenseees 139 Exposure compensation ValU Einicio 116 Flash compensation value 178 PC mode indicator 227 Flash ready indicatot 173 FV lock indicator 0 181 Flash sync indicator is Aperture stop indicator 353 Electronic analog exposure display A er 113 Exposure compensation display A ere 116 Auto ISO sensitivity TNGICATOL nee essesseeesccnssesecnesssseceesnnees 98 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSUPES cssesseesseesssesscessccsseeses 45 When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted I The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 11 The Shooting Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining buffer capacity and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the button is pressed To clear shooting in
119. On This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject Option Description AFE Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the EE AFE Normal camera waits for the specified period long normal or default short before adjusting the distance to the subject This 2 _ prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is AF Short briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance Off to the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession li 270 a5 AF Activation This option controls whether both the shutter release button and the AF ON button can be used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus is only initiated when the AF 0N button is pressed Option Description Shutter AF ON Autofocus can be performed with the AF 0N button or by default pressing the shutter release button halfway AF ON only Autofocus can only be performed using the AF ON button a6 AF Point Illumination Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description Auto The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as default needed to establish contrast with the background On The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of the brightness of the back
120. TING WARM TONE j CYANOTYPE TRIM SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 1 Protect StatUs sess 5 Retouch history 0 ssssessscesseees 329 2 Retouch indicator 6 IMage COMMENT 317 3 High ISO noise reduction 263 7 Camera name Long exposure noise 8 Folder number redUCt ON sssssssssssssesssssssreressssere 262 frame NUMDEL uu escseecsseeseeesseeee 258 4 Active D Lighting uu 167 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 250 214 EE GPS Data oN E 35 36 371 4 Cali 139 43 696 5 T aus 35m 6 JIN U0 eR AN l 01 15 29 7 105 07 1 Protect Status ccesseecseeees 221 6 Coordinated Universal Time 2 Retouch indicator 329 UTC 3 Latitude 7 Heading 4 Longitude 8 Camera name 5 Altitude 9 Folder number frame NUMbET ssssssssssssssssssssssssss 258 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken pg 201 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass 215 HE Overview Data 216 N P 1 8000 F4 8 3200 H 1 3 1 3 4 REAR 1 Folder number frame number 2 Protect status sssessseesesssssse 221 3 Camera name 4 Retouch indicator 329 5 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image pg 211 Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness in image 6 ISO sensitivity
121. Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual Camera Body 1 Release mode diial ccseeee 75 2 Release
122. The LOW PASS FINEN earar eenetyconss E pg 371 E N NO a A A pg 371 Clean at Startup Shutdown ssssssssssssssssssseesssssseeessssseesssss pg 372 Manual Cleaning aeee ten ee eA aaeeea EA Anaea pg 374 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions pg 377 Troubleshooting esente Aaaa a iias pg 381 ErrOmiMeSSAGES srcicccrcesestsentoccrssscesestssssatsocsscceseseatensocetrtese pg 388 fs oh or ate E ee eer eee pg 396 Specifications wricisecccescteccercercrore crete rere 349 Compatible Lenses 350 Camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode gt eee M Eales ake Lens accessory range finder 9 eD enon a Type G or D AF Nikkor 3 ml AF S AF I Nikkor K E lal 4 PC Micro 85mm f 2 8D4 gt Y ivi y AF S AF I Teleconverter v v YViVviVvivi 4 Other AF Nikkor 3 L except lenses for F3AF a alle alla Al P Nikkor vv V iVv iv4 i iVv v Al Al S Al modified or 10 a3 Pe ee Series E Nikkor K E ee Medical Nikkor 120mm 16 Z 4 IF Z 2 Reflex Nikkor Vv v wW g PC Nikkor v Y v IY Al type Teleconverter v Y v8 jy 2 PB 6 Bellows Focusing 3 m oO is L Attachment K Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 v3 v v 8 v PN 11
123. Transfer pictures pg 224 and print them from a computer using ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX available separately pg 367 Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW NEF pictures TIFF Photographs TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer Some digital print services may also support TIFF check with the service before ordering 230 Direct USB Connection If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied USB cable selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the camera Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF pg 240 Select MTP PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer pg 232 Print photographs Print multiple Create index prints one ata time photographs pg 233 pg 236 pg 239 l Disconnect USB cable 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB pg 169 231 BE Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select MTP PTP ss If the USB option in the camera setup menu has been changed from the default setting of MTP PTP display the USB menu and selec
124. Viewfinder Description Battery fully charged ml Battery partially discharged al Low battery Prepare to charge battery or ready spare battery Ca cA Shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter 3 Check the number of exposures remaining The exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings When this number reaches zero amp will flash in the exposure count h displays while the shutter speed displays will show a blinking F wit or Fuk Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if there is room for approximately 1 260 exposures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K _ 125 5 6 aa cal ogen 7 5 g F55 EmA E a NORM E E 45 46 LCD Illuminators Holding the power switch in the 8 Power switch position activates the exposure meters and control panel backlights LCD illuminators allowing the display to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminator will remain lit for six seconds at default
125. WB bracketing increment 124 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses ws 200 Camera battery indicato 44 MB D10 battery type display 285 MB D10 battery indicator 286 Shooting menu bank Custom settings bank Picture Control indicator Color space indicator Active D Lighting indicator High ISO noise reduction TINGICATOL siiis ssnin 263 Long exposure noise reduction indicator Release mode single frame continuous indicator Continuous shooting speed 77 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator WB bracketing indicator 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 mage Sizes 60 Electronic analog exposure displayi na 113 FV lock indicator sss sssssssrsssssssesssessee 181 ISO sensitivity indicator 96 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 98 Exposure compensation PNCICATON i csscisssssssencsectenessisinncececonsioess 116 Flash compensation indicator oss csessseesscssssssssseeseessncsnssseeees GPS connection indicator Beep INGICATOL A sseesecsecsseesceceseeeeee Flash MOE eeeecscssssscecsssescecessseeeesneee Multiple exposure indicator 188 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 XPOSUTES noirissa 45 Number of exposures remaining ssssssessssssosoosscseoosssssssssssssssssss 77 Manual lens numbet esscsessseeees 200 White balance u
126. YBACK MENU Mote O E selected menu G Pavback folder w Hide image Press to position the cursor ree in the selected menu K er El Slide show 5 Highlight a menu item ma PLAYBACK MENU j a Delete Press A or W to highlight a E iano K IN Display mode menu item al mage review ig TE After delete Rotate tall E Slide show 6 Display options Press gt to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or to highlight an option 27 28 8 select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button PLAYBACK MENU ma w Playback folder Hide image _ Display mode pm mage review TE After delete Rotate tall El Slide show Note the following points e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway pg 52 Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor help can be displayed by pressing the O n button A description of the currently selected option or menu will be displayed while the button is pressed Press A or W to scroll through
127. achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex Nikkor lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out After changing the zoom position select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture BE The Non CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select Non CPU lens data SETUP MENU Battery info j Highlight Non CPU lens data e t Image authentication OFF DN Save in the setup menu pg 312 N SA Nor cPU ens data To and press gt Rosie E Firmware version ap 2 Select a lens number fe Now PU lens data Highlight Lens number and fea press or Ptochoosealens A a Faca lent rm number between 1 and 9 hala X Y Bl Move 3 Select a focal length E Non CPU lens data Highlight Focal length mm a y Done and press or gt to choosea Eia focal length between 6 and gag emmm aperture 4 000 mm Xr f Move 4 Select amaximum E Non CPU lens data aperture p x Done Highlight Maximum aperture Ei Fc lent rn and press or to choosea oe maximum aperture between SL f 1 2 and f 22 The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the te
128. al Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast 5 043U0 24N DIq IV sjuawjsn pe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced Brightness brightness Does not affect exposure s Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust S Saturation saturation automatically according to the type of scene 3 z or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower 3 A values reduce saturation and higher values increase it 55 Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make 3 5 H reds more purple blues more green and greens more s3 se yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome 35 effects photographs Choose from Off the default setting os 35 yellow orange red and green pg 155 Sa Choose the tint used in monoc
129. all the necessary software from the supplied installer CD see the Install Guide for more information To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Before connecting the camera select the USB USB option in the camera setup menu pg P 319 and choose a USB option from MTP lt A Mass Storage PTP default and Mass Storage as Sanur OO described below Operating system Nikon Transfer Camera Control Pro 2 e Windows Vista 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate editions Peo o e Windows XP Home Edition Mass Storage Choose Professional MTP PTP Mac 0S X version 10 3 9 or 10 4 10 Choose Windows 2000 Professional Mass Storage See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems 1 Windows 2000 Professional Do nor select MTP PTP when using Nikon Transfer If MTP PTP is selected when the camera is connected the Windows hardware wizard will be displayed Click Cancel to exit the wizard and then disconnect the camera Be sure to select Mass Storage before reconnecting the camera 225 226 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select a USB option Before connecting the camera to the computer make sure the correct
130. and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable Hold the camera as shown at right when framing photographs in portrait tall orientation For information on framing photographs in the monitor see page 79 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus pg 52 At default settings the y camera will focus on the Cal subject in the center Focus Buffer focus point Frame a indicator capacity photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the camera is able to focus a beep will sound and the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder If the subject is dark the AF assist illuminator may light automatically to assist the focus operation Viewfinder display Description J Subject in focus J Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock and the number of exposures that GER can be stored in the memory buffer pg 77 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus pg 70 51 52 2 Press the shutter release E button the rest of the way Q down to shoot Smoothly press th
131. and no photographs can be taken Speedlight SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 SB28DX cp copy 582255822 pea Ne SB 28 SB 26 SB 20 RA Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Vv Y M Manual Y Y Y Y ma Repeating flash Y REAR Rear curtain sync Vv Vv Vv Vv 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm 360 M Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D300 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed The SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination With other Speedlights the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF assist illumination and red eye reduction When used with AF lenses with focal lengths
132. annotimeasurewhite Subject is too dark or too bright 139 balance Problem Solution Page Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D300 142 balance e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image 56 uality option selected for image White balance bracketing HET P 9 unavailable TA S e Multiple exposure mode is in 189 effect A auto is selected for sharpening Effects of Picture Control contrast or saturation For differ from image to consistent results over a series of 154 image photographs choose a setting other than A auto Metering cannot De Autoexposure lock is in effect 114 changed Fxposure compensation Choose exposure mode F 5 or A 116 can not be used Reddish areas may appear in long Reddish areas appear in LImEFEXPOSUrES Turn l ng h tos exposure noise reduction on when 262 P i shooting at shutter speeds of Ke hi Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in Lower built in flash 175 continuous shooting mode 385 386 BE Playback Problem Solution Page Flashing areas appear in images Shoot na datsaBbEar Press A or W to choose photo Sima 2 PP information displayed or change 208 250 g settings for Display mode A graph appears during playback NEF RAW image is Photo was taken at image quality of NEF 57 not played back JPEG Some photos are not displayed during Select
133. aperture Setting shutter speed CHANA mC f Jek Main command dial 3 Frame a photograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 250 s S Aperture f 8 fsi AF Micro Nikkor Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture Electronic Analog Exposure Displays The electronic analog exposure displays in the control panel and viewfinder show whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 1 3 EV 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 1 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV Control panel Os Aa Ce ee aera ey Pe ee mirii Viewfinder Long Time Exposures At a shutter speed of tur i amp the shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL3e battery or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open Note that noise an
134. ard LCD brightness Select World time and press l claan image sensor gt K DN Lock mirror up for cleaning f Video mode HDMI AUTO 5 Set time zone Py Time zone Date and time A time zone selection dialog Ee will be displayed Press q or gt gy Daylight saving time to highlight the local time zone fue the UTC field shows the Ue ICSE difference between the E Time zone selected time zone and breta ER aR Sb07 00 00 25 Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press 6 Turn daylight saving time iS World time Daylight saving time on or off Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 7 Set the date and time World time lt Date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or gt to select an item A or VW to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time 37 38 8 Set date format E World time lt Date format Press A or W to choose the A order in which the year month a Hi nn and day will be displayed and i press 9 Exit to shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway 7 to exit to shooting mode The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when
135. attery before charging e Calibration not required Charging life A five level display showing battery age 0 1 indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher The MB D10 Battery Pack The information displayed when the camera is By Battery info powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack pts Do nae depends on the type of batteries used q Picmeter 209 143 iF Charging life 0 Sue i 2 Done Bat meter Pic meter Calibration Charging life EN EL3e Vv Vv Vv EN EL4a EN EL4 option Vv Vv Vv Vv 8 x AA option Vv Wireless Transmitter This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network using an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter See Connections Wireless and Ethernet Networks pg 229 323 Image Authentication Choose whether to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon s optional Image Authentication software Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs Photographs take
136. avadisoasonasss 258 File Nanig iene aa E R 260 Image Quality 260 Image Size 260 JPEG Compression 260 NEF RAW Recording sssssccssssccsssscccssecessstcccsneceesusecssneeenees 261 White Balam Gens dcssnscsccsvsnassevsensascedpenniacysannauscenendaiyennesvenpecles 261 Set Picture CONEHOL csssconsseccotivsssannesnascoseovsssesnnenssisendeannacensenaiees 261 Manage Picture COntrol ssssscssssecssssssccseecesssecssseseesneesssees 261 Color Space z Active D Lighting ssssssssssessessssssseoessssoeeessssooeeeesssoereesssseeeese 261 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction 262 FHIG ISO NR oeenn ae a a 263 ISO Sensitivity Settings sssssssssssssssssssssssssssrsssssssssssssssssesresseee 263 Live VICW sesser 263 Multiple Exposure 263 Interval Timer Shooting s sssssssssssssssssssssserssssse 263 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Custom Setting Bank uu eesseseccssescecnsecssseeseenseees 266 Reset Custom Settings 266 a AUTOFOCUS ssseeessccssseeececnssees 267 a1 AF C Priority Sel Ction ssesssssssscsseccesseecesuteccsseesesneeese 267 a2 AF S Priority Selection ssssssssssscssescssseecesneeeesneesesseeese 268 a3 Dynamic AF Area esssssescseecssesescssseneesseesseesseeseenseenseesees 269 a4 Focus Tracking With LOCK ON ssssssssccsseccssetecesseees 270 a5 AF Activation is a6 AF Point Illumination ue eeessss
137. be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Daylight saving time Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available De Deutsch German Pt Portugu s Portuguese En English English Ru Pycckun Russian Es Espanol Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish Fi Suomi Finnish 3 ch3z S288 Traditional Chinese Fr Fran ais French f px Simplified Chinese It Italiano Italian BA BAR Japanese NI Nederlands Dutch Ss sla Korean PI Polski Polish 316 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed in ViewNX or Capture NX available separately pg 367 The comment is also visible on the third page of the photo information display e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 256 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to E nase comment attach the comment to all subsequent o photographs Attach comment can be Y Done turned on and off by highlighting it and Gare ames pressing gt 317 318 Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On the default option is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback pg 251 or when viewed in ViewNxX or Capture NX available separately pg 367 The following orientations
138. bit 3 TOMB is al NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit _ 13MB 133 oe NEF RAW Compressed 14 2 MB 112 27 14 bit 3 NEF RAW Uncompressed 19 4 MB 98 17 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed 25 3 MB 75 16 14 bit 3 L 36 5 MB 52 16 TIFF RGB M 21 2 MB 93 20 S 10 2 MB 208 29 L 5 8 MB 276 43 JPEG fine 4 M 3 3 MB 488 89 S 1 5 MB 1000 100 L 2 9 MB 548 90 JPEG normal 4 M 1 6 MB 946 100 S 0 7 MB 2000 100 L 1 5 MB 1000 100 JPEG basic 4 M 0 8 MB 1800 100 S 0 4 MB 3900 100 402 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is settoH 0 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher or long exposure noise reduction active D lighting or image authentication is on 3 Maximum frame rate when recording 14 bit NEF RAW images is 2 5 fps 4 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d5 Max Continuous Release pg 282 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 403 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph ISO
139. bracketing sequence is zero 9 F and is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 184 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display pg 131 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode pg 91 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded White Balance Keeping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade direct sunlight or under incandescent lighting Unlike the film used in film cameras digital cameras can mimic this adjus
140. camera or file is corrupt File can not be played back on camera 393 394 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Memory cara does Images created with Cannot select not contain images ee other devices can not 330 this file that can be be retouched retouched Check printer To n resume select Check printer Printer error Continue if 231 available fate __ insert paper of Check paper Paperiniprinter S correctsizeandselect 231 not of selected size Continue Paper jam _ Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 231 printer Continue Insert paper of Out of paper PNAS OUTO selected size and 231 paper select Continue Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Check ink Check ink To resume lInk error s 231 supply select Continue Out of ink Printer is out of ink Replace ink and 231 select Continue See printer manual for more information 395 Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics s DOT AU ES ianuarie ieia Aa aaaeeeaa AEEA RAER e Memory Card Capacity e Exposure Program ssssessesessesessesresrssesrsssesrssesses e Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range ssssssssssssssssssssssssssses pg 405 396 Defaults The following defaults are restored either with a two button reset or using Reset shootin
141. ce personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 2a 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL3e battery or connect an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning Emma Remove the lens and turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press gt note that this option is not available at battery levels of lt a or below 3 Press fe Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be x LAM When shutter button is pressed displayed in the monitor and a row of Z j FE To lower mirror turn camera off dashes will appear in the control panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off iem 374 4 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink 5 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 7 6 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint fr
142. cted interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed bracketing and shooting menu options other than White balance and Interval timer shooting note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Dust off ref photo options in the setup menu can not used 189 190 HE Interrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure inthe shooting Pemma menu while a multiple exposure is being a recorded displays the options shown at right fcne To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e A two button reset is performed pg 184 e T
143. cts Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection A Donot use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury A Donot place the strap around t
144. cture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the same as that selected for standard shooting 1 Contrast Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the AF ON button is pressed in continuous servo autofocus mode In both single servo and continuous servo autofocus modes the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus v Focusing with Contrast Detect Autofocus Contrast detect autofocus will take longer than normal phase detection autofocus In the following situations the camera may be unable to focus using contrast detect autofocus e The camera is not mounted on a tripod e The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame e The subject lacks contrast e The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness e Across star filter or other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point e The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved
145. cus if the subject is dark or low contrast Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator Es Focus is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when the in focus indicator is displayed 267 268 a2 AF S Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority in single servo AF To select single servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to S Option Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release Release button is pressed a Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator default is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will lock while the in focus indicator is displayed a3 Dynamic AF Area If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic area AF C23 pg 64 is selected in continuous servo AF focus mode C pg 62 the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Choose the number of focus points from 9 21 and 51 based on subject movement Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the fajg 2 Points camera will focus based on information from the default surrounding eight focus points Choose when aut there is time to compose the photograph or when
146. d color distortion may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu pg 262 See Also Shutter speed 35 s Aperture f 25 See Custom Setting f10 Reverse indicators pg 311 for information on reversing the electronic analog exposure display 113 114 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 1 Select center weighted or Metering selector spot metering pg 102 Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock If using center weighted metering select the center OHER focus point with the multi selector pg 66 m G te 2 Lock exposure Shutter release button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock exposure and focus except in manual focus mode Confirm that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder AE L AF L button While exposure lock is in effect an AE L Ok Ga Se indicator will appear in the viewfinder eg em i25 565 oaea 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In sp
147. e pg 250 2 Display only if Focus point is selected for Display mode pg 250 ER 209 BE RGB Histogram 1 Protect Status sess 221 5 Histogram RGB channel 3 In all 2 Retouch Indicator 329 histograms horizontal axis gives 3 Image highlights areas of image pixel brightness vertical axis that may be overexposed are number of pixels marked by a flashing border 6 Current channel 4 Folder number 7 Histogram red channel frame NUMDEL eesessesseesseeeee 258 8 Histogram green channel 9 Histogram blue channel 3 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode pg 230 2 Highlights can be displayed separately for each ABS color channel Press lt or gt while pressing 9 button to cycle through channels as follows a RGB R G B all channels red green blue Highlight display off 210 3 Some sample histograms are shown below e If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even e If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left e If the image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the right Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambien
148. e Hide or reveal selected pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select set Hide or reveal selected pictures Deselect all Reveal all pictures 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image 249 250 Display Mode Choose the information available in the ma Display mode playback photo information display z pg 208 Press A or W to highlight an M E Hiohliohts option then press P to select the option for RRaiRMann the photo information display A Y appears ohana next to selected items to deselect highlight and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press gt Option Description Basic photo info Highlights Highlights are shown by blinking border in photo information display Focus point Active focus point or in single servo AF focus point where focus first locked is shown in red in photo information display No focus point is displayed if camera was unable to focus using continuous servo autofocus or if continuous servo autofocus was used with auto area AF o etailed photo info RGB Red green and blue histograms are displayed in photo histogram information display Shooting data pages including camera name Data metering exposure focal length white balance
149. e rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Photographs can not be taken until processing is complete and jab mr has cleared from the displays Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete Off default Long exposure noise reduction off 262 High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description HIGH High Normal NORM default LOW Low Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 800 and higher Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of HI 0 3 and higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR Off ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings pg 96 Live View Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used when the camera is in live view mode pg 80 Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures pg 186 Interval Timer Shooting Take photographs automatically at pre selected intervals Use for time lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or butterflies emerging from cocoons pg 191 263 264 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Custom Settings are used to customize
150. e Battery 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 2 Open the battery chamber cover Open the battery chamber cover on the SS bottom of the camera 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 4 Close the battery chamber cover BE Removing the Battery Before removing the battery turn the camera off To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xx and 377 380 of this manual To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F During charging the temperature should be in the vicinity of 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatures above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info pg 322 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not i
151. e See page Can view my photographs on the Camera playback 206 camera Can view more information about Photo info 208 photos Why do parts of my photos blink Photo info highlights 209 250 vii viii Question Key phrase See page How do get rid of an unwanted photo Deleting individual 222 photos Can I delete several photos at once Delete 248 Can l zoom in on pictures to make sure Playback zoom 220 they re in focus Can protect photos from accidental Protect 221 deletion Can I hide selected photos Hide image 249 How do I tell if parts of my photos may be Display mode iis 250 overexposed highlights How do I tell where the camera focused e mogefocus 250 Can I view photos as they are taken Image review 251 Is there an automatic playback slide Slide show 252 show option EE Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase See page How do I bring out details in shadows D Lighting 334 Can I get rid of red eye Red eye correction 335 Can I crop photographs on the camera Trim 336 Can I create a monochrome copy of a Monochrome 337 photograph Can I create a copy with different colors Filter effects 338 Can use the camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs color palance 338 Can overlay two photos to make a single Image overlay 339 image BE Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices
152. e Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as amp incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 133 134 HE The WB Button At settings other than I Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis pg 132 to fine tune white balance when i or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 132 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired pg 133 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A
153. e digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF Selecting Print set DPOF from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 1 Choose Select set ia Print set DPOF Highlight Select set and press gt 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture in full screen press amp button To Om button select the current picture for ma Print set DPOF printing press the O n button 2 ee and press A The picture will T Ba Kem RA be marked with a amp icon and ee the number of prints will be Se set to 1 Keeping the On button pressed press A or V to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected 3 Select imprint options wa Print set DPOF W Select set Highlight the following options and Y press to toggle the highlighted option on or off to complete the print E C Imorint date order without including this a information proceed to Step 4 e Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order ia Print set DPOF W Select set Highlight Done and press amp to complete the print order
154. e digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer e HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection the camera uses a type A connector 413 414 Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D10 multi power battery pack are given below e CIPA standard EN EL3e camera Approximately 1000 shots EN EL3e MB D10 Approximately 1000 shots EN EL4a MB D10 Approximately 2000 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 1000 shots e Nikon standard 2 EN EL3e camera Approximately 3000 shots EN EL3e MB D10 Approximately 3000 shots EN EL4a MB D10 Approximately 5900 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 2500 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s flash
155. e reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data ike EAEE and the message shown at right will be satis an ie asan displayed Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1 m Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera histograms and highlights are not displayed 321 322 Battery Info View information on the battery currently E Battery info inserted in the camera Bat meter t Pic meter Lo E Charging life 0 ROUZ i 2 Done Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage Pic meter The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance Calibration This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack equipped with an EN EL4a or EN EL4 battery pack available separately e CAL Due to repeated use and recharging calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate b
156. e shutter eo ey 8 L release button the rest of the way down to take the picture Access lamp While the photograph is being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light Do not eject the memory card turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down Hi gt Focus Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the A button A photograph will be displayed in the monitor 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or gt To view additional information on the current photograph press A and W pg 208 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 251 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting 53 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Disp
157. e types of bracketing exposure bracketing flash bracketing and white balance bracketing In exposure bracketing pg 119 the camera varies exposure compensation with each shot while in the case of flash bracketing pg 119 flash level is varied with each shot i TTL and in the case of the SB 800 auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 357 359 Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released meaning that several shots are required to complete the bracketing sequence Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot In white balance bracketing pg 123 the camera creates multiple images each time the shutter is released each with a different white balance adjustment Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence White balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with different white balance settings See Also At default settings the camera varies both exposure and flash level Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg 298 is used to choose the type of bracketing performed Changes to bracketing settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 303 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f5 Assign preview button pg 306 or the AE
158. ea photograph focus and shoot Non CPU Lenses If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu pg 199 when a non CPU lens is an attached the current f number will be displayed oul Jm in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture a displays will show only the number of stops 4F with maximum aperture displayed as AF and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Select exposure mode M Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Main command dial 111 112 2 Choose aperture and shutter speed Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set x 25 4 or to values between 30 s and s 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure tu hi Pg 113 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Check exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays see page 113 and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved Sub command dial Setting
159. ed halfway If subject moves camera will engage Continuous predictive focus tracking pg 63 to predict final distance to servo AF subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority Camera does not focus automatically focus must be M adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring If Manual maximum aperture of lens is f 5 6 or faster viewfinder pg 71 focus indicator can be used to confirm focus electronic p9 range finding pg 72 but photographs can be taken at any time whether or not subject is in focus Choose single servo AF for landscapes and other stationary sub jects Continuous servo AF may be a better choice with erratically moving subjects Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus The AF ON Button For the purpose of focusing the camera pressing AF ON button the AF ON button has the same effect as pressing AA the shutter release button halfway Predictive Focus Tracking In continuous servo AF the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF ON button is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom
160. efore discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal Nikon Nik PYIN UOyIN uo shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer xxiii Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera
161. elected for JPEG compression L a Image size Large Images are 4 288 x 2 848 pixels in size 60 Iso 200 ISO sensitivity digital equivalent of film 96 sensitivity speed set to ISO 200 White AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically for 128 balance Auto natural colors under most types of lighting P Camera automatically adjusts shutter speed Exposure i Mm d Programmed and aperture for optimal exposure in most 104 auto situations Center Focus focus point f 66 point single point AF Focus point Viewfinder focus point display is shown above Camera focuses on subject in center focus point when shutter release button is pressed halfway 47 48 2 Choose exposure mode F Exposure mode F is selected at shipment If another exposure mode is selected press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode F The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations MODE dial Main command dial 3 Choose single frame release mode S single frame release mode is Release mode dial lock release selected at shipment If another release mode has been selected hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial to S single frame At this setting the camera will take one photograph each time the shutter release butto
162. en a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera For information on using the retouch menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Option See page Ey D lighting 334 Red eye correction 335 X Trim 336 CH Monochrome 337 Q Filter effects 338 amp 2 Color balance 338 sh Image overlay 339 mO Side by side comparison 342 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control pg 150 329 Creating Retouched Copies Except in the case of Image overlay pg 339 and Side by side comparison pg 342 the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full frame playback as well as from the retouch menu HE Creating Retouched Copies in Full Frame Playback 1 Choosea picture Display the desired picture in full frame playback pg 206 2 Display the retouch menu Fs SURG Red eye correction vi Press to display the retouch menu Q Filter effects sof Color balance Cancel 3 Select retouch options Highlight the desired item in _ Heeii the retouch menu and press gt N Cyanatype to display retouch options for f more information see the Nav Sancel section for the selected item on the following pages To return to full frame playback without creating a retouched copy press P See Also See page 229 for information on using the button with the WT 4 wireless transmitter 330
163. ent fe Select image gt Copy d 0 4 Highlight a source image E White balance E Select image Highlight the source image To j ighlightthe sourceimage To z E ooe Teal view the highlighted image full frame press the button A i l PRE Set Zoom 5 Copy white balance Press the center of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment pg 317 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance White balance preset d 0 d 4 and press gt to select another Gx Preset manual preset ct gt Change Set Edit comment Select image Copy d 0 143 144 HE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 128 and press gt F White balance Incandescent Fluorescent Y Direct sunlight Flash W 2 Cloudy I ty Shade KI Choose color temp 2 Preset manual gt 2 Selecta preset Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector To select the highlighted preset and display fine tuning menu pg 132 without completing the next step press instead of pressing the center of the multi selector i White balance A oh
164. eparate file 336 M Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality pg 56 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Aspect ratio Possible sizes 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 960 x 640 640 x 424 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 x 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 32 ae 960 x 720 640 x 480 oun 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x 1 440 1 200 x 960 896 x 720 608 x 480 Monochrome Copy photographs in Black and white E Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white monochrome ff Blakandunite P c Sepia e Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype Increase displays a preview of the selected saturation image press A to increase color 4 4 saturation W to decrease Press fa e to create a monochrome copy A D Decrease Darker lighter WSave saturation 337 Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Skylight Cancel Save Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm
165. ery EN EL3e pp 30 32 Additional EN EL3e batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives The EN EL3e can be recharged using an MH 18a or MH 18 quick charger e Multi Power Battery Pack MB D10 The MB D10 takes one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries It is equipped with a shutter release button AF ON button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D10 remove contact cover for the MB D10 from the camera Quick Charger MH 18a pg 30 The MH 18a can be used to recharge EN EL3e battery e AC Adapter EH 5a EH 5 These AC adapters can be used to power the camera for extended periods Power sources e Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage Wireless LAN The camera can also be controlled from any computer on adapters the network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or a second EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details Viewfinder
166. ery order 287 Beep 281 Body cap 5 34 367 Bracketing 118 298 299 exposure 118 298 299 flash 118 298 299 white balance 118 123 Bracketing order 300 Built in AF assist illuminator 273 Bulb 112 Burst 188 282 304 c C 62 69 267 269 Camera Control Pro 2 224 225 367 Center weighted 102 277 278 Center weighted area 277 CL mode shooting speed 282 Clean image sensor 371 Clock 37 316 battery 38 CLS 357 Color balance 338 Color space 169 Adobe RGB 169 sRGB 169 Color space 169 Color temperature 129 130 135 CompactFlash 39 313 369 Computer 224 Control panel 8 CPU contacts 352 CPU lens 35 352 Creative Lighting System 357 Custom setting bank 266 Custom Settings 264 Customize command dials 308 D Date and time 37 316 Daylight saving time 37 316 DCF version 2 0 170 413 Default settings 184 257 266 397 restoring 184 257 266 Delete 248 All 248 Selected 248 Delete 54 222 248 all images 248 current image 54 222 selected images 248 Depth of field 105 Depth of field preview button 105 298 306 Digital Print Order Format 230 236 240 413 Diopter 43 365 adjustment control 43 Display mode 250 D Lighting 334 DPOF 230 236 240 413 Dust off ref photo 319 Dynamic AF area 269 51 points 3D tracking 270 Dynamic area AF 64 65 269 E Easy exposure compensation 276 Electronic analog exposure display 11
167. es above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled body water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off BE Clean Now
168. esesssesssesssesssesseessesssesssesseessesssesssesseesseeass 14 Quick Start Guide we csccsssessesseeseessesssessessessseesesssssesssesnessscssesseeseeess 21 Tutorial 23 Camera MENUG c csesssssssssessssessssessssecssessssesscssssscsssaesesscseecsesseseeseaees 24 Using Camera MenUsS sssescssscssescssesseeccesscsseecsseecneessseecsneeesseesees 26 Helpnsninsenonimnimen naa R RN First Steps sssesssssessessesessseersosssse Charge the Battery Insert the Battery Attach a Lens Basic Setup Insert a Memory Card ssesscsssessccsseccsseseccssecessseecsnecessusecssneeessseeees Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS sssscssssssscssssscsssecsssesescneesssseeessneeesens Basic Photography and Playback Image Recording Options 55 Image Qualy lt satecscssccscus ceccesiscsssave coasts cecssecessspncessisceetauncacbeecubanceecneua 56 Image SIZE iir a n E E R E RR 60 Focus 61 FOCUS MOCO wiecscscssscscssssssssssesssssessesssesssssessessssesssssssessssssssssssessssssssesses 62 AFArea MOG iscstssiccuicccdscssdecstcssavsicsctlasceieassdoivascsesae aa 64 FOCUS Point SELECTION ecesscsscsssssesscssessessssssssscsscsessssssssssessssesseseeees 66 FOCUS LOCK ssessessesesseesees Manual Focus Release Mode 73 Choosing a Release Mode cssssssssssscsssssecsseescesseecsnseeccsseeecsnseeessees 74 CONTINUOUS MOCE eessssscssssccsseccssecesseccsseccssccssscesssccensceeseecsaeecsseesnsees 76 Framing Pictures in the Mo
169. essed Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also For information on choosing the role played by the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 69 70 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus pg 71 or use focus lock pg 68 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example subject is the same color as the background The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example subject is inside a cage The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns Example a row of windows in a skyscraper The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject
170. essseesecesseseceessssesesecsssecs 271 a7 FOCUS Point Wrap Around cssscsssssccsseececssecsssetecesseees 272 AB AF point selection ssssssssssesssssssssssssssssoeereosssssssssssssoeeeeees 272 a9 Built in AF assist illuminator sss ssssssssessessssesssseessssessssess 273 a10 AF On for MB D10 274 b Metering Exposure sss 275 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value 275 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cnttl ssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseessssse 275 b3 Exp Comp Fine TUNE ssssssssessssssressssssreesssssesesssseeeresssee 275 xiv b4 Easy Exposure Compensation sessssseecceseteccsseeeenees 276 b5 Center Weighted Area cccssscssssscsssssccsecssssteccsseesesees 277 b6 Fine Tune Optimal ExpOSure sesccssscsssscsseessssecsessesees 277 C Timers AE LOCK w sesssessccssseteceesssseeees 279 c1 Shutter Release Button AE L 279 c2 Auto Meter off Delay 279 c3 Self Timer Delay ssssscssssccsssscsssscccssecsssssecesseeeesntecesneees 280 C4 Monitor Off Delay sesssssssccsssseccsssscssseescssesessneeseeneeeseneees 280 d SHOOING Display sssssesscsesseessecessessecssseeecsessssecessensseeseesse 281 dT BEEP n ee eA AEE ER EG Eaa 281 d2 Viewfinder Grid Display 281 d3 Viewfinder Warning Display 282 d4 CL Mode Shooting Speed 282 d5 Max Continuous Release ssesssccsseccsseseccsseeseseteceeneees 282 d6 File Number SEQUENCE sesss
171. esult from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 18a quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 8 4 V 900 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Charging time Approx 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions WxHxD Approx 90 x 35 x 58 mm 3 5 x 1 4 x 2 3 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding power cable EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 4V 1500 mAh Dimensions WxHxD Approx 39 5 x 56 x 21 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding terminal cover Supported Standards e DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File System DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera e DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card e Exif version 2 21 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers e PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with th
172. ete from card a Highlight Yes and press to TOLL delete the selected Picture z MONOCHROME 02 Control Yes No 166 Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day Active D Lighting High j gt 4 Active D Lighting off Normal Active D Lighting Low 167 168 To use active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting SHOOTING MENU White balance AUTO Inthe shooting menu pg 254 ss aoe highlight Active D lighting fi ye and press P CO ee 5 E ISO sensitivity settings a 2 Choosean option E Active Dishing e Highlight Off Low Normal or High and press M Active D Lighting Additional time is required to record images when Active D Lighting is on pg 403 Use matrix metering pg 102 Although exposure is in fact reduced to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows highlights underexposed areas and mid tones are automatically adjusted to prevent the resulting photograph from being underexposed The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 153 can not be adjusted while active D Lighting is in effect M Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Ligh
173. ew them on a television set Connecting tO a COMPUTES ssesesessssssososesssessososesessososo pg 224 Direct USB CONNECCION seare reena a EAEE NE EEA pg 226 Wireless and Ethernet Networks cccssscccssesecsssesccsseeeessseeees pg 229 Printing Photographs ccccssscecscsccsscecececccseseceeee pg 230 Direct USB Gonnectioneneesseccuncssteeca sce pg 231 Viewing Photographs on TV scssscssesecsesesecsesceaes pg 242 Standard Definition Devices ssssssssssssessssssseesssssseeesessseeesssssees pg 242 High Definition Devices sseesssscsesscsseeceseecssecccscecsseecsnecessecesees pg 244 223 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer using the supplied UC E4 USB cable Once the camera is connected Nikon Transfer supplied or optional Nikon software such as Camera Control Pro 2 can be used to copy photographs to the computer or control the camera remotely m Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately pg 367 can be used to control the camera from a computer Before connecting the camera set the camera USB option pg 225 to MTP PTP When Camera Control Pro 2 is running F will be displayed in the control panel 224 EH Before Connecting the Camera Inst
174. eyepiece accessories e Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK 20C To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 5 4 3 2 0 0 5 1 2 and 3 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 2 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved e Magnifying Eyepiece DK 21M The DK 21M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 1 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m t for greater precision when framing e Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that call for added precision DK 22 eyepiece adapter available separately required e Eyepiece Adapter DK 22 The DK 22 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier to the D300 e Right Angle Magnifying Viewing Attachment DR 6 The DR 6 attaches to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position 365 366 Filters e Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw in slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding e The D300 can not be used with linear po
175. f the lettering in the information display pg 12 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color B_8es 55 wl soma a mS 4 7 Dark on light Light on dark 284 d8 LCD Illumination At the default setting of Off the control panel backlight LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is in the 8 position If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active pg 46 Select Off for increased battery life d9 Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of Off shutter is released when the shutter release button is pressed When shooting with Tripod selected in live view mode pg 86 or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised d10 MB D10 Battery Type To ensure that the camera functions as expected when eight AA batteries are used in the optional MB D10 battery pack match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when usi
176. f5 Assign preview button pg 306 and f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 the depth of field preview and AE L AF L buttons can be used with the command dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button 17 Hl White Balance Press the WB button and rotate the command dials Choose a white balance setting pg 129 Main command dial Control panel Fine tune white balance pg 134 set color temperature R IO N EE L pg 135 or choose a white balance preset pg 145 HE Flash Settings WB button Press the 4 button and rotate the command dials Sub command dial gt A Control panel Choose flash mode pg 173 Main command di Adjust flash compensation pg 178 SN YZ a A A ON 4 button Sub command dial Control panel Attaching the AN D300 Camera Strap Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below The BM 8 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cove
177. ff Photographs can be taken immediately mode Display menus MENU See page 245 for more information Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 251 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting In single frame self timer and mirror up release modes photographs are displayed one at a time as they are B taken In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed so that the A and Y buttons display other images and the lt and gt buttons control photo information See Custom Setting f3 Photo info playback pg 302 for details 207 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to 7 pages of information for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data are only displayed if Data is selected for Display mode pg 250 while the RGB histogram page is only displayed if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken
178. fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium shutter speed 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused 415 416 Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Symbols C Single point AF 64 65 2 Dynamic area AF 64 65 269 Auto area AF 64 65 S 62 68 74 268 CL 74 76 81 282 CH 74 76 79 Self timer 91 Mvp 93 3 Matrix 102 103 278 Center weighted 102 277 278 J Spot 102
179. focus point If type G or D lens is used camera can distinguish human subjects from Auto area background for improved subject AF detection In single servo AF active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses Active focus points are not displayed in continuous servo AF 64 AF Area Mode Pt25 5 6 AF area mode is shown in the control panel L Tg AF area mode indicator AF area mode Control panel Single point AF Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 269 9 points default Dynamic 21 points area AF 51 points 51 points 3D tracking Auto area AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic area AF see Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 269 For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 270 65 66 Focus Point Selection The D300 offers a choice of 51 focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame The focus point can be selected manually allowing photographs to be composed the main subject positioned
180. form both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only 4 to perform only flash level bracketing or WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing pg 123 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode Option Description gri Flash speed Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level default Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies shutter speed and aperture Custom PETA Flash speed Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter speed aperture aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e5 set to 7 9 aperture AE only or aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash 4 Flash only Camera varies flash level only Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control pg 98 299 e7
181. formation from the monitor press the MA button again or press the shutter release button halfway At default settings the monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 20 seconds i button ich i is if 21 22 2324 25 26 so a ipl a a a Hees oo 20 e EN IS0 AUTO RA Gz ory Q INTERVAL mo 4 I CUSTO ZEDA 9 10 T5 fos OME ISOM EAL AdobeRGB FISD Pa eee I al 17 16 15 14 13 12 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display see Custom Setting d7 Shooting info display pg 284 12 PWN 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Exposure MOE csseeesccssseeeceeenseeeees 104 Flexible program indicatov 107 Flash sync indicator Shutter speed 108 111 Exposure compensationvalue 116 Flash compensation value 178 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence A Focal length non CPU lenses Color temperature eecsccseeescceeeee 135 Color temperature indicator 135 Aperture stop indicator Aperture f number Aperture number of stops eal 353 Exposure and flash bracketing increMeNt eseeee 120
182. g e Choose start time trigger Choose a new starting trigger and start time as described on page 191 2 Resume shooting gt Interval timer shooting 6 Start Highlight Start gt Restart and press Note that if interval timer photography was paused T003 x2 0006 during shooting any shots E OMove Set 16 49 remaining in the current interval will be canceled 195 196 HE Interrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset pg 184 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu pg 257 e Changing bracketing settings pg 118 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends BE No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet to be taken the memory buffer or memory card is full or the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF note that the camera focuses again before each shot Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In CH continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of up to six shots per second In S single frame and C continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooti
183. g menu or Reset custom settings HE Defaults Restored with a Two Button Reset pg 184 Option Default ISO sensitivity pg 96 200 Image quality pg 56 JPEG normal Shooting Image size pg 60 L menu White balance pg 128 Auto Fine tuning pg 131 Off Choose color temp pg 135 5000 K Focus point pg 66 Center Exposure mode pg 104 Programmed auto Flexible program pg 107 Off AE lock hold pg 114 Off Other Exposure compensation pg 116 Off settings Flash compensation pg 178 Off Bracketing pg 118 Off Flash mode pg 176 Front curtain sync FV lock pg 180 Off Multiple exposure pg 186 Off 1 If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored 2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 255 Settings in all other banks are unaffected 397 BE Defaults Restored with Reset Shooting Menu pg 257 Option Default File naming pg 260 DSC Image quality pg 56 JPEG normal Image size pg 60 Large JPEG compression pg 58 Size priority NEF RAW recording pg 58 Lossless Type compressed NEF RAW bit depth 12 bit White balance pg 128 Auto Fine tuning pg 131 Off Choose color temp pg
184. g speed pg 282 3 Maximum frame rate in continuous low speed mode is 7 fps If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in the shooting menu pg 98 maximum frame advance rate in continuous high speed mode is 7 5 fps 4 Frame rate slows at low temperatures and when batteries are low Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right PS 56 edian shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 37 pictures p P o5 L aC oean F56 an Auto Image Rotation The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst even if the camera is rotated during shooting See Auto Image Rotation pg 318 77 p 78 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full In rare cases frame rate may also drop when a microdrive memory card is used While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on the number of the image
185. graph v a button halfway to focus then X View the photograph pg 53 100ND300 DSC00017 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007 10 15 29 4288x2848 10 Delete unwanted photos pg 54 Press twice to delete the current photograph T button Tutorial This section describes how to use the camera menus how to ready the camera for use and how to take your first pictures and play them back First StepStone EAA AAAA EAAS AEEA a TA Charge the Battery Insert the Battery Attach a Lens BaSiGSetu oae eaa a T EN Inserta Memory Card ecssscssssccsecsssscssceccsccesscecsseecsnscesseesneeesnseests Adjust Viewfinder Focus Basic Photography and Playback 23 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options MENU button can be accessed from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button Tabs Custom Settings setup retouch and My menus see following Choose from playback shooting ES shows position in current menu page CD brightness lean image sensor ock mirror up for cleaning Current settings are shown by icons 5 Menu options options in current menu If icon is displayed help for current item can be viewed by pressing Om button pg 29 24 BE Menus The following menus are available
186. graph and focus In single servo autofocus pg Focus mode selector 62 photographs can only be taken if the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder WZ es N J Cover the Viewfinder In exposure modes other than manual cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from DK 5 eyepiece cap interfering with exposure g 91 p 92 3 Start the timer Press the shutter release button all the way down to start the timer The self timer lamp AF assist illuminator will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will become more rapid Raising the flash interrupts the timer To restart wait until the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button halfway To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting huLi In self timer mode a shutter speed of tin amp amp is equivalent to approximately 10 s See Also For information on changing the timer duration see Custom Setting c3 Self timer delay pg 280 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 281 Mirror up Mode Choose this
187. ground Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see Off The selected focus point is not highlighted 271 272 a7 Focus Point Wrap Around Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description Focus point selection wraps aor GaN around from top to bottom o ol bottom to top right to left and left Wrap to right so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display No wrap default The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect a8 AF point selection Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description AF51 51 points defau Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right ooo 200 poo ooo0o0 000 0000 20000 000 0000 It 0000 000 0000 000 990000 AF11 11 poi Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for quick nts focus point selection a9 Built in AF assist illuminator Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor
188. gs 325 Saving camera settings 325 Self timer delay 280 Sensitivity 95 96 98 Set Picture Control 150 Monochrome 150 Filter effects 153 155 Toning 153 155 Neutral 150 Standard 150 Vivid 150 Setup menu 312 Shooting data 212 213 214 Shooting info display 284 Shooting info display 12 284 Shooting menu 254 Shooting menu bank 255 Shutter priority auto 108 Shutter release button 51 52 68 114 279 half press 51 52 68 114 Shutter release button AE L 279 Side by side comparison 342 Single point AF 64 65 Size 60 Slide show 252 Frame interval 252 Slide show 252 Slow sync 176 Speedlight 357 Spot 102 278 T Television 242 314 315 Ten pin remote terminal 201 368 Thumbnail 218 TIFF RGB 56 Time 37 316 Time exposure 113 Timer 91 191 Trim 336 Two button reset 184 U USB 225 319 Mass Storage 225 MTP PTP 225 319 USB 224 225 232 319 cable i 226 228 232 UTC 37 203 215 V Video 89 242 314 cable i 242 mode 314 Video mode 314 Viewfinder 10 20 43 91 407 eyepiece 20 90 91 193 eyepiece cap 91 193 focus 43 71 Viewfinder grid display 281 Viewfinder warning display 282 ViewNX 56 149 170 230 w WB 123 128 White balance 128 Auto 128 Choose color temp 129 135 Cloudy 129 Direct sunlight 128 Flash 129 Fluorescent 128 Incandescent 128 Preset manual 129 136 Shade 1
189. he camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted Interval Timer Photography The D300 is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals 1 Select Interval timer a SHOOTING MENU ao Color space shooting p Active D Lighting F x Long exp NR H K N High ISO NR Highlight Interval timer f E 150 sens stn shooting in the shooting 4 1 MDE cia OFF J menu pg 254 and press gt ett K 2 Selecta starting trigger ES Interval timer shooting e Choose start time Highlight one of the following Choose start time options and press P gt e e Now Shooting begins about o CEM 3 s after settings are completed proceed to Step 4 e Start time Choose a start time see Step 3 q O Start time 1 a M Before Shooting Choose single frame S continuous low speed Ct or continuous high speed CH release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Remember that the camera will focus before each shot no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF Before choosing a starting time select World time in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date pg 36 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is
190. he neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation A Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not short or disassemble the battery e Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards e Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins e Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains e When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place e The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool e Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation xix Z Observe proper precautions whe
191. he sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the camera may become noticeably warm and the temperature of its internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected In exposure modes other than manual cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure To reduce blur in tripod mode choose On for Custom Setting d9 Exposure delay mode pg 285 Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits To use the self timer mount the camera on a tripod recommended or place the camera on a stable level surface and follow the steps below 1 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Release mode dial 2 Frame the photo
192. hoose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to individual settings Quick adjust Sharpening Contrast i Brightness f Saturation Hue A GaGrid GOK Reset 1 Select a Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set Picture Control menu pg 150 and press gt T Set Picture Control 10 ED Standard oy ENL Neutral EVI Vivid OK EMC Monochrome ic e Grid GAdiust 2 Adjust settings Press A or W to highlight the desired setting and press lt q or gt to choose a value pg 153 Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or pe Vivid o Quick adjust Sharpening m Contrast o Brightness o T Saturation a Ga Grid ONOK Reset i select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the button 3 Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk XK in the Set Picture Control menu 152 Grid GAdiust Bl Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutr
193. hrome photographs from SF B amp W black and white the default setting Sepia 8 El Toning Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow e Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple pg 155 153 M A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type Gor D lens for best results The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 amp 3 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the 9 button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings 154 Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness Orange of the sky in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more cont
194. hted Area When calculating exposure center Option weighted metering assigns the greatest 8 gt 6mm weight to a circle in the center oftheframe 6 b 8mm default The diameter of this circle can be setto 10 610mm 6 8 10 or 13 mm or to the average of the 913 613 mm entire frame Ava Average Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non CPU lens is used regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 198 b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 6 EV 1 Select Custom Setting b6 gt b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Custom Setting b6 ic sna shade Fine tune optimal exposure l E and press gt 277 2 Select Yes The message shown at right will be displayed highlight Yes and press to proceed or select No to exit without altering exposure E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure is altered from the default value Continue No 3 Selecta metering method Highlight Matrix metering Center weighted or Spot metering and press gt i b6 Fine tune optimal exposure es Matrix metering o gt ca Center weighted 0 Spot metering 0 4 Choose an exposure value Press A or W to cho
195. ight not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information Flash Contacts The D300 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable BE The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera without a sync cable pg 358 The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin such as the SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 BE The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe M ISO Sensitivity When auto ISO sensitivity control is on pg 98 ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted as required for optimal flash output when an optional SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 flash unit is attached This may result in foreground subjects being underexposed in photographs taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background In these cases choose a flash mode other than slow sync or choose a larger aperture 363 364 Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D300 e Rechargeable Li ion Batt
196. ile photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor View other Keep multi selector pressed to scroll arcas of rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation image window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border E View other Rotate main command dial to view same location in other images at current zoom images rR ratio Change protect On See page 221 for more information status Return to Monitor will turn off Photographs can be shooting l taken immediatel mode Sa l Display MENU See page 245 for more information menus 220 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame zoom and thumbnail playback the O n button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the if button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted pp 41 313 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list ESS 100ND300 _ DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007 10 15 29 4288x2848 2 Press the On button The photograph will be marked with a icon To remove protection from the 100ND300 DSC_0001 JP J 0 15 29
197. ing To cancel before all copies have Start printing been printed press cancel m Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB pg 56 can not be selected for printing See Also See page 394 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 235 Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 4 on page 232 on 100ND300 _ DSC_0001 15 12 2007 10 15 29 236 2 Choose Print select or a PictBridge Print DPOF Highlight one of the following f gt Print DPOF options and press gt f dex rit e Print select Select pictures for Nw printing e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu pg 240 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 239 for more information 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press amp button To select the O n button current picture for printing A Print select press the Om button and press ae A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to
198. ing supported with built in System CLS flash SB 800 or SU 800 as commander and SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units Sync terminal Standard ISO 519 terminal White balance White balance Auto TTL white balance with main image sensor and 1 005 segment RGB sensor 7 manual modes with fine tuning color temperature setting Live view Modes Hand held tripod Autofocus e Hand held Phase detection AF with 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors e Tripod Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame Monitor Monitor 3 in 920 000 dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Playback Playback Full frame and thumbnail four or nine images playback with playback zoom slide show histogram display auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Interface USB Hi Speed USB Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL HDMI output Version 1 3a with type A HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect remote control or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires opt
199. initial zoom setting from off Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point 301 302 Option Description Pressing center of multi selector displays list of folders Highlight folder and press to select folder Choose folder for playback Folder can not be changed if only one folder exists of if Current is selected for Playback folder pg 249 f2 Multi Selector If Reset meter off delay is selected operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off pg 46 will activate the exposure meters If Do nothing the default option is selected the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector is pressed f3 Photo Info Playback At the default setting of Info A W Playback lt gt pressing A or Y in full frame playback changes the photo information displayed while pressing lt or gt displays additional images To reverse the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing A or W displays additional images and pressing lt or gt changes the photo information displayed select Info lt gt PlaybackAW This setting also applies to the multi selector on the optional MB D10 battery pack f4 Assign FUNC Button Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself FUNC button press or when used in combination with the command dials FUNC button dials ry B
200. ional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Chinese Simplified and Traditional Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL3e battery Battery pack Optional MB D10 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries EN L4a EN EL4 and AA batteries available separately A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries AC adapter EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 411 412 Dimensions weight Dimensions WxHxD Approx 147 x 114 x 74 mm 5 8 x 4 5 x 2 9 in Weight Approx 825 g 1 82 lb without battery memory card body cap or monitor cover Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may r
201. is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or anew memory card is Off inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs Same as for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 On default Reset 1 File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d6 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card 283 d7 Shooting Info Display At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color o
202. ity auto control in shooting menu the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing mode M pg 299 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone EE White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white balance bracketing GS 25 Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom d 1 Eaa Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg ike 298 L 2 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel ik Number of shots Fn button Main command Control panel dial WB bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a icon and WB bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel 123 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired NZ Sy S Tt Fn button Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 15 mired Higher B values correspond to increased amounts Sub command dia
203. l White balance increment Control panel 10 mired or 3 of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber pg 132 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel display shots increment Bracketing order EVs ne fo Pte eke enes C 0 1 0 bar i 3 1B 1B 0 2B HJE 3 1A 1A 2A 0 ber i 2 1B 0 18 Aer 2 1A 0 1A JF i 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B GF i 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A E Ouest F tenement 7 1A1B 1B 2B 3B 0 4A 3A 2A 1A i Beebe ae asians S JF ptecrunfiees 9 1A1B 1B 2B 3B 4B Z See Also See page 133 for a definition of mired 124 4 Framea photograph focus and 4 shoot Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining em EAS the exposure count displays in the i IS control panel and viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted 125 126 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the
204. l pg 275 1 3 step b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 275 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 276 Off b5 Center weighted area pg 277 8mm Fine tune optimal exposure pg 277 b6 Matrix metering 0 Center weighted 0 Spot metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 279 Off c2 Auto meter off delay pg 279 6s c3 Self timer delay pg 280 10s c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 20s Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings bank option will be reset pg 266 Settings in all other banks are unaffected 399 Option Default d1 Beep pg 281 High d2 Viewfinder grid display pg 281 Off d3 Viewfinder warning display pg 282 On d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 282 3 fps d5 Max continuous release pg 282 100 d6 File number sequence pg 283 On d7 Shooting info display pg 284 Auto d8 LCD illumination pg 285 Off d9 Exposure delay mode pg 285 Off d10 MB D10 battery type pg 285 LR6 AA alkaline d11 Battery order pg 287 Use MB D10 batteries first e1 Flash sync speed pg 288 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed pg 291 1 60 s e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 TTL e4 Modeling flash pg 298 On e5 Auto bracketing set pg 298 AE amp flash e6 Auto bracketing Mode M pg 299 Flash speed e7 Bracketing
205. larizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead e The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens e To prevent moir use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame e Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 Optional flash units Nikon Speedlights SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 e Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB R200 e Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 See page 358 for more information PC card adapters e EC AD1 PC Card Adapter The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots Software Capture NX A complete photo editing package e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk e Image Authentication Determine whether photographs taken with image authentication pg 324 on have been modified after shooting Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet Body cap e Body Cap The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place 367
206. lay the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page gt button 100ND300 DSC_0001 15 12 2007 10 15 29 2 Delete the photograph Press the button A confirmation dialog will be displayed i button yan 100ND300 _ DSC_000 15 12 2007 10 15 2 Press the t button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press P Delete To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 248 54 Image Recording Options This section describes how to choose image quality and size Image Quality eee eee eare reee eea eeens ears pg 56 Image Si Zee eeaeee aea e een E eaa pg 60 55 Image Quality The D300 supports the following image quality options Option Filetype Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format NEF Use with images that will be transferred to a computer for printing or NEF RAW NEF processing Note that once transferred toa computer NEF RAW images can only be viewed using compatible software such as ViewNX supplied or Capture NX available separately pg 367 Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF RGB TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging ap
207. lease button halfway to return to n bd Step 4 and measure white balance again IAS Viewfinder 6 Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the control panel 7 Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 279 The default setting is six seconds Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list PRE Select Set To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored pg 141 BE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4
208. leconverter and lens 199 5 Select Done fs Non CPU lens data Highlight Done and press The specified focal length and Facai lent mm aperture will be stored under pe the chosen lens number This O e Ose combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below BE Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 303 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 306 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 200 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal Maximum length aperture Sje Lens number Main command dial Using a GPS Unit Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately pg 368 allowing inf
209. lect and return to previous menu m Pase size Printer default 3 5x5in 5x7in A4 No of copies Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to choose number of copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu a No of copies Border Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu y Border APrinter default Print with border No border Time stamp Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu y Time stamp APrinter default Print time stamp No time stamp 234 Option Description Cropping Menu shown at right will be cropping displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop picture highlight Crop and press gt L No cropping If Crop is selected dialog A Cropping shown at right will be displayed Press amp to increase size of crop QE to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and press GB Qs WOK Select Start printing and press to start print
210. lem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected 381 382 BE Shooting Problem Solution Page Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled e Memory card is full or not inserted e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture e Exposure mode S selected with bust amp selected for shutter speed 39 45 308 108 Photos are out of focus e Rotate focus mode selector to or e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock 62 68 71 Problem Solution Page Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using Seek erent aie optional SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 288 p Speedlight choose 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds Focus does notlock when Camera is in focus mode C use AE L shutter release button is 69 AF L button to lock focus pressed halfway Image size can not be f changed Image quality set to NEF RAW 56 e Unlock focus selector lock 66 e Auto area AF selected for focus 64 mode choose another mode __ e The camera is in playback mode
211. ll repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down in single frame release mode white balance bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate for CH release mode Matrix Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed 5 Center Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weighted button is pressed g Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed None No operation is performed when the Fn button is default pressed This option can not be used in combination with FUNC button dials pg 305 Selecting this options displays a message and sets FUNC button dials to None If another option is selected for FUNC button dials while this setting is active FUNC button press will be set to None HE FUNC Button Dials Selecting FUNC button dials for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description If the Fn button is pressed when the command nO 1stepspd dials are rotated changes to shutter speed f aperture exposure modes S and M and aperture exposure modes A and M are made in increments of 1 EV Choose non Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to Non PU CPU lens choose a lens number specified using the Non number CPU lens data option Press the Fn button and rotate the main command Auto dial to choose the number of shots in the BKT bracketing bracketing program Press the Fn button a
212. llaneous Problem Solution Page Date of r c rding is Set camera clock 36 not correct Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or Menu item can not be when no memory card is inserted Note 322 selected that Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional AC adapter 387 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Lens aperture ringis Set ring to minimum FEE ae p not set to minimum aperture largest 35 blinks aperture f number lt a ca Low battery Ready a fully charg d 44 spare battery e Battery exhausted Recharge or replace battery e Battery can notbe e Contact Nikon used authorized service representative e An extremely e Replace the battery oe a A exhausted or recharge the xxiii 30 blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery if the 32 battery or a third rechargeable Li ion party battery is battery is exhausted inserted either in the camera or in the optional MB 10 battery pack Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 36 blinks 388 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture
213. ltiple exposure gt Reset in the am shooting menu C ja 7 Framea photograph focus and shoot In continuous high speed and continuous low ZN speed release modes pg 74 the camera records all exposures in a single burst In single frame release mode one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 190 The icon will blink until shooting ends When shooting ends multiple ich Nua exposure mode will end and the iicon 6 will no longer be displayed Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures 188 vV Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view pg 79 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the sele
214. m Picture Controls Media Type and Il CompactFlash memory cards UDMA compliant microdrives Storage File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 94 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 19 5 mm 1 0 m Diopter adjustment 2 1 m7 Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera P and S modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses e DX AF Nikkor All functions supported e Type G or D AF Nikkor All functions supported PC Micro Nikkor does not support some functions IX Nikkor lenses not supported e Other AF Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il Lenses for F3AF not supported e Al P Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II e Non CPU Can be used in exposure modes f and electronic
215. mal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter pp 371 374 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera ina dry well ventilated area If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once amonth Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover
216. me rate can be chosen using low speed Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 76 o While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous Si high speed up to 6 frames per second Frame pictures in monitor pg 79 Recommended at high or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is Live view hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in obtaining very precise focus Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake pg 91 Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mup or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirror up_ slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs pg 93 1 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d4 at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 2 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 74 To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial p 75 Continu
217. ment can be chosen from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 3 EV are listed below Control panel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs oF oF 0 0 ee a 3 0 3 0 0 7 a ar Di 3 0 3 0 7 0 eras 2 0 0 3 Pra 2 0 0 3 SP hs 3 0 0 3 0 3 5 E hik 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 bo E EE EN FS ft 7 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 OED S TETEE EE GF DJ evitan 3 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 275 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e7 Bracketing order pg 300 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot D The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation see page 116 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot AT Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment OEV 1 EV 1 EV 121 122 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the
218. mera image sensor pg 374 Video Mode When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a type A cable available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below Option Description AUTO Auto default The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480P 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576p 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720p 720p progressive 1 280 x 720 progressive format 1080i 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected 315 World Time Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically Time zone SZR set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock pg 36 Choose the order in which the day month and year are Date format displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically
219. mode dial lock FElCASC ssssesseesseessesssesseesseees 75 3 QUAL image quality size DUTTON siscsissrisiiscsssisiessriosiiviisse 57 60 Two button reset button 184 4 Eyelet for camera strap 19 5 WB white balance button sssssssssssseesssss 129 134 135 6 150 ISO sensitivity button 96 7 Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 363 9 Shutter release button 51 52 10 E4 exposure compensation DUtON aissinkecdccsananaasane 116 Two button reset button 184 11 MODE exposure mode DUTTON eeceesecsssteccssescssssecesasecessees 105 eat FOr Mat DUTTON essen 41 12 Eyelet for camera strap 19 13 Focal plane mark 4 72 14 Control panel eecsssessccsecseeseeeees 8 Camera Body Continued 3 4 flash mode button flash compensation DUTON ssssssseesscssacscosasscacensavadscstnanss 178 4 Flash sync terminal COVER EE 363 5 Ten pin remote terminal COVEN inaina 201 368 6 Flash sync terminal 363 7 Ten pin remote terminal eeseessesssesseesseeeee 201 368 8 Connector Cover 226 242 9 Video CONNECHOM ecsesseeseeeeees 242 10 HDMI connector 11 DC IN connector for optional AC adapter EH 5a Or EH 5 nianna 364 12 USB connector 226 232 13 Lens release DUTTON 35 14 Focus mode selector 62 71 15 Meter coupling lever 408 16 Mirror uo eesceesessseseeeseees
220. mory card option in the setup menu 41 42 3 Press the buttons again Press the MODE and tt buttons together a second time to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings D i5 5 6 win wC eget S 56 2gh54m m Memory Cards e Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera e Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback e Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card e Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects e Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks e Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card e Do not expose to water high levels of humidity or direct sunlight No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the control panel and vie
221. mpensation are made in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV 1 1step 275 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation This option controls whether the 4 button is needed to set exposure compensation pg 116 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting On Auto selected using the command dial is reset when the reset camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the 4 button are not reset RESET As above except that the exposure compensation On value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the default button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 308 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off default On m F Sub command dial Sub command dial 2 3 5 Sub command dial Main command dial 2 2A Main command dial Sub command dial on N A 276 b5 Center Weig
222. n A Use appropriate cables handling the quick charger When connecting cables to the e Keep dry Failure to observe this input and output jacks use only precaution could result in fire or the cables provided or sold by electric shock Nikon for the purpose to maintain e Dust on or near the metal parts of compliance with product the plug should be removed with regulations adry cloth Continued use could A CD ROMs result in fire CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment e Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock e Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power A Observe caution when using the flash cable Do not place it under e Using the camera with the flash in heavy objects or expose it to heat close contact with the skin or or flame Should the insulation be other objects could cause burns damaged and the wires become e Using the flash close to the exposed take the power cable to subject s eyes could cause a Nikon authorized service temporary visual impairment representative for inspection Particular care should be Failure to observe this precaution observed when photographing could result in fire or electric infants when the flash should be shock no less than one meter 39 in e D
223. n My Menu highlight Add eat items and press gt 6O N run Remove items Rank items 2 Selecta menu i Add items Highlight the name of the Playback menu menu containing the option f AWA Custom setting menu 7 Y Setup menu you wish to add and press gt 7 eae 3 Select an item E Add items O Shooting menu bank Highlight the desired menu 2 x Fil i item and press pen Image size v JPEG compression v NEF RAW recording 344 4 Position the new item EE Image quality Press A or W to move the new PEG compression item up or down in My Menu B NEE RAW recordins amp Press to add the new item Move OROK 5 View My Menu E Additems O Shooting menu bank The items currently displayed in My BY aiet Menu are indicated by a check mark a Items indicated byaNiconcannotbe imams v JPEG compression selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select NEF RAW recording additional items 345 Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu 4 highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items i Remove items E Done 7 O Image quality O JPEG compression SA O NEF RAW recording T O 4Assion FUNC button Highlight items and press to select or deselect Selected items are indicated by a check mark 3 Select Done i Remove items a Highlight Done and press z I sera A confirmation dialog will be
224. n be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icons are no longer displayed in the control panel and viewfinder 181 182 vV Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL the default option is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units available separately Set the optional flash to TTL mode the SB 800 can also be used in AA mode see the flash manual for details While FV lock is in effect flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 291 FV lock can be used with remote SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units if a any of the built in flash flash group A or flash group B is in TTL mode or b a flash group is composed entirely of SB 800 flash units in TTL or AA mode Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional speedlight are as follows Speedlight Flash mode Metered area i TTL 4 mm circle in center of frame Stand alone flash unit KA Area metered by flash exposure meter Used with other flash i TTL Entire frame units Advanced AA Area metered by flash exposure
225. n demand grid lines displayed Off default On demand grid lines not displayed 281 282 d3 Viewfinder Warning Display Choose whether low battery warning is displayed in the viewfinder Option Description On default A low battery lt a icon is displayed when the battery is low Off Low battery warning is not displayed in the viewfinder d4 CL Mode Shooting Speed This option determines the maximum frame advance rate in CL continuous low speed mode during interval timer photography this setting also determines the frame advance rate for single frame mode Choose from values between one and seven frames per second fps the default setting is 3 fps Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds and that the maximum frame rate without the optional MB D10 battery pack is 6 fps d5 Max Continuous Release The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 402 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer d6 File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder
226. n is pressed 4 Choose single point AF single point AF is selected at shipment If another AF area mode has been selected rotate the AF area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to At this setting the user can AF area mode selector choose the focus point at default settings the center focus point is selected 5 Choose single servo Focus mode autofocus selector S single servo autofocus is selected at shipment If another focus mode has been selected rotate the focus mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to S single servo autofocus At this setting the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected focus point when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus 6 Choose matrix metering Metering selector amp 3 matrix metering is selected at shipment If another option has been selected press the metering selector lock button and rotate the metering selector to 3 Matrix metering uses information from the 1 005 segment RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame 49 50 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support
227. n use m Incompatible Batteries The D300 can not be used with EN EL3 or EN EL3a rechargeable Li ion batteries for the D100 D70 series or D50 or with the MS D70 CR2 battery holder EN EL3e Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL3e shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels pg 44 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged pg 322 33 34 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed 1 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap After confirming that the camera is off remove the rear lens cap from the lens and remove the camera body cap 2 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place Mounting index If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority 3 Remove the lens cap EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while t
228. n with image authentication on are marked with a f icon on the file information and overview pages of the photo information display pp 209 217 Option Description Image authentication information embedded in new on photographs as they are taken Off Image authentication information not embedded in new default photographs 1 Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF RGB photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu pg 329 324 Save Load Settings Select Save settings to save the following settings to the camera memory card if the memory card is full an error will be displayed pg 391 Menu Option Playback Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting all banks Shooting menu bank File naming Image quality Image size JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Set Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Custom settings all banks All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings 325 326 Menu Option Setup Clean image sens
229. ncel before all copies have been printed press l Page Size Border Time Stamp and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings Only options supported by the current printer can be selected Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes See Also See page 394 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 238 BE Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures pg 236 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print a PictBridge Highlight Index print in the pe Print select PictBridge menu pg 236 and N Print DPOF press P f The confirmation dialog shown atright Pamm will be displayed PEKARA C 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 3 Adjust printing options r Stw Choose page size border and time oreina stamp options as described on page 238 Border a warning will be displayed if the Tine Stam selected page size is too small 4 start printing Highlight Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before printing is complete press 239 240 BE Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to creat
230. nd default rotate the sub command dial to select bracketing increment If continuous servo AF focus mode C pg 62 is _ Dynamic AF selected when dynamic area AF C3 is chosen for Ce fa AF area mode pg 64 the number of focus points can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating either of the command dials pg 269 None No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed 305 306 f5 Assign Preview Button Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button either by itself Preview button press or when used in combination with the command dials Preview command dials The options available are the same as for FUNC button press pg 303 and FUNC button dials pg 305 except that the default option for Preview button press is Preview and the default setting for Preview command dials is None f6 Assign AE L AF L Button Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the A command dials AE L AF L command dials The options available for AE L AF L button press are the same as for FUNC button press pg 303 except that AE L AF L button press defaults to AE AF lock and has an additional AF ON option if this option is selected pressing the AE L AF L button has the same effect as pressing the AF ON button to initiate aut
231. nd press P button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off HDMI pg 315 At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high definition device The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu pg 315 Menu Guide This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus The Playback Menu Managing Images pg 246 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Option pg 254 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings e eee ae E E pg 264 The Setup Menu Camera SetUup s sssessessesscsscsscos pg 312 Ki The Retouch Menu Creating Retouche d Copies heerseres tireto eaea tek akese pg 329 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu ssesseseseoscoses pg 344 245 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below For information on using the playback menu see Tutorial Camera Menus Delete 248 Playback folder 249 Hide image 249 Display mode 250 Image review 251 After delete 251 Rotate tall 251 Slide show 252 Print set DPOF 240 246 Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for Delete pg 248 Hide image pg 249 Print set DPOF pg 253 and direct printing pg 236 1 Highlight a picture i Print
232. ne NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic are viewed on the camera only the JPEG image will be displayed When photographs taken at these settings are deleted both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted The Image Quality Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the shooting menu pg 254 57 BE The JPEG Compression Menu The JPEG compression item in the shooting menu offers the following options for JPEG images Option Description Size priority default Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size Quality varies with scene recorded ie Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu Type The NEF RAW recording gt Type item in the shooting menu offers the following compression options for NEF RAW images Option Description Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible ONE compressed algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 default percent with no effect on image quality NEF images are compressed using a non E reversible algorithm reducing file size by about ON Compressed 40 55 percent with almost no effect on image quality Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed Recording time increases slightly 58 BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu NEF RAW Bit Depth The NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth item in
233. ng speed pg 282 Using the Monitor Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks pg 255 If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting menu pg 257 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now e Interval 00 01 00 e Number of intervals 1 e Number of shots 1 e Start shooting Off 197 198 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known e Automatic power zoom can be used with SB 800 and SB 600 Speedlights available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to
234. ng EN EL3e or optional EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries Option Description BLR6 LR6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries BNiWH HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries BFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries QZR6 ZR6 AA Ni Mn Select when using ZR6 Ni Mn AA batteries 285 286 Using AA Batteries EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries available separately or EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion batteries are recommended for best performance Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries pg 414 The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline and nickel manganese batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Viewfinder Description Taza Batteries fully charged z cA Low battery Ready fresh batteries a CA r blinks blinks Shutter release disabled Change batteries Battery level for EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries is displayed normally d11 Battery Order Choose whether the battery in the camera o
235. ng copies although this may result in loss of detail Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim pg 336 and Image overlay copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format 333 D Lighting D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs Before Press A or W to choose the amount of Dlishting correction performed The effect can be me ii jj N previewed in the edit display Press to E mo a H copy the photograph a v cancel Zoom Save 334 Red Eye Correction This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding To Use nescence Press Q p to y G D 3 zoom in SI utton Zoom in
236. nitor Live View cssssssssecsseeesees 79 Self Timer Mode Mirror up MOde cecsssccsssccsssccsssccsssccssccessccessccesscceseeceasecsueecsnecsneesseees ISO Sensitivity 95 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually esssssessssseescnsseescnseeesssees 96 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Exposure 101 Metering sirrinin an area na 102 Exposure MOE essesssssessresrsessrssrssrssrsrsorsrrsrssrsrensrsrosresrsrssrsresrssresrs 104 P Programmed AUto ssoseesssccsssesseccsssesscscssetscseesnsesessesseeseesees 106 5 Shutter Priority AUC sssssssesseccssseesecssseseesessnsecsseessseeseeess 108 Fi Aperture Priority AUtO ssssssssccssssssecssseececssnseesssessseesseess 109 PRE Martha sasstesscasssesenaaticcesscaualascoaschats sasssexesetndeissnyaisctecasiesciannvenncaning 111 Autoexposure AE LOCK cecsssssssssssessssssecssessessscsssecsscsssesssessneeesees 114 Exposure COMPENSATION ou seesssessessescneensccsseseestensesseeneeneesseeseensees 116 Bracketing ci cisccccd cvcecsaaccctsvecessaaccocivacscsiicstsdacendd ecesttucansanancacesaaceavess 118 xi White Balance 127 White Balance Options sssssecsssccsssessseecsscessteccsecessccsneeesneessneeess 128 Fine Tuning White Balance ssssssccssssscesssccssseecsnseecsnseessneeeess 131 Choosing a Color Temperature un seescsnsescesssececnseesceneescnsneesensees 135 Preset Manual Image Enhancement 147 Picture Controls niiina 148 Creating Custom Picture ControlS sssss
237. nk from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described on page 256 Custom Settings Bank If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values the bank letter will appear in the control panel and shooting information displays An asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu Reset Custom Settings Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings bank See page 399 for a list of default settings Custom Settings are not reset when a two button reset is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank No default Exit without changing Custom Settings a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus priority in continuous servo AF To select continuous servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to C Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release default button is pressed Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in Release ei focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for focus fares improved fo
238. not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 191 192 3 Choose a start time By Interval timer shooting O start time Press dor to highlighthours PE T E or minutes press A or W to AN ia St cots AS change The starting time is f SR not displayed if Now is LV E selected for Choose start time Choose an interval E Interval timer shooting A Dinterval Press lt or P to highlight K ooo oo hours minutes or seconds press A or to change Note g that the camera will not be XY DETIENE able to take photographs at the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or the time required to record images 5 Choose the number of gt Interval timer shooting 1G select intvlsXno of shots intervals and number of E m 0008 gt shots per interval Kaon GE f OHO ia Press lt or gt to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or W to aint change The total number of i003 x 2 000 shots that will be taken is 7 L displayed to the right Number of Number Total intervals of shots number of interval shots 19 05 Ner ww 6 Start shooting gt Interval timer shooting Start Highlight Start gt On and a press to return to the Eor z E p 00 shooting menu without Senate starting the interval timer E GMove set 16 48 highlight Start gt Off and press The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting
239. ns focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data pg 198 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1 125 s If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 198 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock or shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5S Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5S Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5S or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation Use preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder 351 352 m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D300 e TC 16AS AF teleconverter e Lenses for the F3AF AF80mm f 2 8 e Non Al lenses AF ED200mm f 3 5 TC 16S e Lenses that require the AU 1 teleconverter focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm_ PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier
240. nswer index HE New Features Question Key phrase See page How do take high quality NEF RAW 14 bit NEF RAW 59 photos Can use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 79 Can control how photos are processed Picture Controls 148 How do preserve details in shadows and ee highlights Active D Lighting 168 How do focus on erratically moving 3D tracking 270 subjects Can adjust focus separately for different AF fine tune 327 lenses How do I remove dust from the low pass Cleaning the low pass 371 filter protecting the image sensor filter HE Camera Setup Question Key phrase See page How do focus the viewfinder Viewfinder focus 43 Boe do keep the monitor from turning Monitor off delay 280 How do keep the shutter speed and Auto meteroff 46 279 aperture displays from turning off Question Key phrase See page How do set the clock How do set the clock for daylight savings time World time 36 316 How do I change time zones when travel How do adjust monitor brightness for LCD brightness 313 menus or playback How do restore default settings Two button reset 184 How do restore shooting menu Reset shooting menu 257 defaults How do I restore Custom Setting Reset custom settings 266 defaults How do I change the self timer delay Self timer delay 280 How do I turn the speaker
241. o Optional flash allowing the flash control mode for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and Manual Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available a L gg CLE ee M4 Manual tr 291 BE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 18 59 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F 292 BE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter Sa 3 Flash cntrl for builtin flash is open producing a strobe light effect Press lt or P to highlight the following Repeating flash L Output Times Frequency 1 32 OM OL options A or W to change Duns 44 2 15 1 50 OSet HOK Option Description Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected Times output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times The options available for Times are determined by flash output Output Options available for Times 1 4 2 1 8 2 5 1 16 2 10 1 32 2 10 15 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 293 HE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional SB 800 SB 600
242. o not handle the plug or charger from the subject with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Notices e No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in the U S A e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residen
243. ode 62 continuous servo AF 62 69 267 269 manual 62 71 84 single servo AF 62 68 268 point 64 66 87 250 269 272 contrast detect 87 tracking 63 270 3D 64 270 predictive 62 63 Focus point wrap around 272 Focus tracking with lock on 270 Focusing screen 407 Format 41 313 Format memory card 313 Front curtain sync 176 FV lock 180 G GPS 201 GPS 201 215 connecting 201 data 202 215 GPS data 215 H HDMI 315 HDMI 244 413 Help 24 29 HI 97 Hide image 249 High definition 244 315 413 High ISO NR 263 Highlights 209 250 Histogram 210 211 250 l Image authentication 324 Image comment 317 Image Dust Off 319 Image file 413 Image overlay 339 Image quality 56 Image quality 56 Image review 250 Image size 60 Image size 60 Index print 239 In focus indicator 51 62 Information 208 250 Interval timer shooting 191 Interval timer shooting 191 ISO sensitivity 95 96 98 ISO sensitivity settings 97 ISO sensitivity 97 ISO sensitivity auto control 98 Maximum sensitivity 98 Minimum shutter speed 98 ISO sensitivity step value 275 i TTL 172 173 294 357 J JPEG 56 58 JPEG basic 56 JPEG compression 58 Optimal quality 58 Size priority 58 JPEG fine 56 JPEG normal 56 L L 60 LAN 364 Language 36 316 LCD 46 285 313 LCD brightness 313 LCD illumination 285 Lens 34 198 327 350 attaching 34 ca
244. off Beep 281 Can reverse the electronic analog h verse indicat rs 311 exposure display Can display the menus in a different Eanguag 316 language Can I save menu settings for use on a i different D300 camera zave loadisettings 343 EE Menus and Displays Question Key phrase See page How do I get more information on a Help 29 menu How do I use the menus Using the menus 24 What do these indicators mean Viewfinder control What information is in the shooting panel shooting 8 10 12 information display information display What does this warning mean Error messages and 388 displays How much charge does the battery have Battery level 44 left vi Question Key phrase See page How do I get more information about the Battery info 322 battery How do keep the file number from being reset when insert a new memory Fiisnumbersequence 283 card How do I reset file numbering to zero How do I clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 370 BE Taking Photographs Question Key phrase See page How many more shots can take with this Number of exposures 45 card remaining How do take bigger photographs How can get more photos on the Image quality and size 56 60 memory card Can I control how the camera focuses Autofocus 61 How do take a lot of photographs Release med 74 quickly Can change the frame advance rate Shooting speed 76 282 Can sh
245. ofocus The options available for AE L AF L command dials are the same as for FUNC button dials pg 305 except that AE L AF L command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd aperture option 307 f7 Customize Command Dials This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Reverse rotation Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No the default option for normal command dial operation or Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 Change main sub At the default setting of Off the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls aperture If On is selected the main command dial will control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 Aperture setting At the default setting of Sub command dial aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Live view is not available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with an ape
246. oint when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV e Spot metering 2 20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and Al Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 3 2 or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Exposure Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV White balance 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 bracketing Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 200 3200 in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 100 equivalent below ISO 200 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 6400 equivalent above ISO 3200 Active D Lighting Can be selected from High Normal or Low Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 3500DX autofocus module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo e Autofocus Single servo AF S continuous servo AF C predictive focus tracking automatically activated
247. om the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 7 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap 375 376 M Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised e If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately vV Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D300 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photograph
248. on of insertion n Terminals Front 39 4 Close the card slot cover r EE Removing Memory Cards turn the camera off T1 Turn the camera off K Confirm that the access lamp is off and 5 A Access lamp 2 Remove the memory card Open the memory card slot cover and press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card 40 EE Formatting Memory Cards Memory cards must be formatted before first use Format the card as described below vV Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding pg 224 1 Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Press the buttons Hold the MODE and i buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds A blinking F a r will appear in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder To exit without formatting the memory card press any button other than the si MODE and buttons See Also See page 313 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format me
249. ons of image quality image size white balance and ISO sensitivity shooting menu settings are not reset when a two button reset pg 184 is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank No default Exit without changing shooting menu settings 257 258 Active Folder Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored HE New Folder Number 1 Select New folder E Active folder E New folder number number i100 Highlight New folder number and press gt 100 999 S 4 Move OSet WOK Choose a folder number Press lt or P to highlight a digit press A or W to change Ifa folder with the selected number already exists a D l or El icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e Folder is empty e Folder is partially full Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full HE Select Folder 1 Choose Select folder E Active folder 1 Select folder Highlight Select folder and fF K aA p 102ND30
250. ontrol set GPS Adapter Cord Connects GPS devices to D300 via PC cable 35 cm A supplied by manufacturer of GPS device i MC 35 pg 201 14 in Modulite Remote Allows infrared remote control at ranges of Control Set ML 3 up to 8 m 26 in 368 BE Approved Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D300 SanDisk Lexar Media 8 GB Professional 8 GB oe rofessiona Extreme IV SDCFX4 4GB UDMA 300 x 4GB 2 GB 2 GB 8 GB 2 GB 4GB 80 x 1GB Extreme III SDCFX3 GB Platinum II 572 MB 1GB 60 x 4GB 8 GB 8 GB 4GB 4GB Ultra Il SDCFH ic a dete 133 x WA eB 1GB i 1GB 4GB 2 GB Standard SDCFB 2GB 8Oxlt Ta MB 1GB Microdrive DSCM 11000 1GB 3K4 2 2 GB 3K4 4 4GB 3K6 6 GB Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer 369 370 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatur
251. oot a self portrait Self timer mode 91 Can take pictures under low light ran without the flash ISOrsenisitivity 8 Can the ISO sensitivity choose be ISO sensitivity auto 98 adjusted to ensure optimal exposure control How do freeze or blur moving objects Exposure mone 5 108 shutter priority auto How do I blur background details or keep Ease mode both foreground and background in P 109 focus aperture priority auto Question Key phrase See page Can I set both shutter speed and aperture Exposure mode M 111 manually manual Can I make photos brighter or darker Exposure compensation 116 How do I make a time exposure Long time exposures 113 Can I vary exposure or flash level Exposure and flash f A 119 298 automatically over a series of photos bracketing Can I create multiple copies ofa photo White balance 123 298 using different white balance settings bracketing K How do l adjust white balance White balance 127 Can take pictures with a flash Flash photography flash 173 How can reduce red eye mode red eye 176 reduction How can record multiple shots as a Multiple exposure 186 single photograph Can I pick the standard exposure level Ege ne aptimal 277 exposure How can reduce blur Exposure delay mode 285 Can the flash be used at shutter speeds Flash sync speed 288 faster than 1 250 s BE Viewing Photographs Question Key phras
252. or Video mode HDMI World time excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation USB Image authentication GPS Non CPU lens data My Menu All My Menu items Settings saved using the D300 can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP1 The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit pg 201 Non CPU Lens Data By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture for up to nine non CPU lenses the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions pg 198 AF Fine Tune Fine tune focus for up to 12 lenses AF tuning is not recommended in most situations use only when required Option Description AF fine tune e On Turn AF tuning on On e Off default Turn AF tuning off Off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or W to choose point away Current Saved a value between 20 and 20 from camera value value Values for up to 12 lenses can be nT gt ine tune stored t Saved value 18 200mm t F3 5 5 6 VR No 4 Choose the AF tuning value used
253. or m persists or appears blinks Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized service representative 391 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Na meiior Camera cannot Turn camera off and y E detect memory confirm that card is 39 card f card correctly inserted e Error accessing e Use Nikon 369 This memory memory card approved card card cannot e Check that contacts be used are clean If card is Card may be aa damaged contact damaged blinks retailer or Nikon Insert representative another card e Unable to create e Delete files or insert 39 248 new folder new memory card 392 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page He F Memory card has Format memory card Fomatthe Er not been formatted or insert new 39 41 for use in camera memory card card Select folder Folder No images on containing images memory card orin from Playback folder contains no 39 249 im d s folder s selected menu or insert ges for playback different memory card No images can be played back until another folder has All photos in Allimages are been selected or a current folder are ee 249 hidden hidden Hide image used to i allow at least one image to be displayed File has been created or modified File does not contain image data using a computer or different make of
254. or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction or unused po
255. or preflashes from the built in flash particular care is required when not using a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance 297 298 e4 Modeling Flash If On the default setting is selected when the camera is being used with the built in flash or an optional SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed pg 105 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e5 Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing pg 118 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE the default setting to per
256. ormation on the camera s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud 201 202 When the camera establishes communication with a GPS device a icon will be displayed in the control panel Photo wall information for pictures taken while the amp icon is displayed will include an additional page pg 215 recording the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds the Bicon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information GPS Data GPS data are only recorded when the amp icon is displayed Confirm that the icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting A flashing C icon indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal pictures taken while the icon is flashing will not include GPS data BE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS
257. ose an exposure value from 1 to 1 EV Press to save changes and exit m Fine Tuning Exposure E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure e Matrix metering Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation amp icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation pg 116 is preferred in most situations 278 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay This option controls how long the camera Option continues to meter exposure when no DAs 4s operations are performed Choose from 4s 6s 6s default 6s 8s 165 305s 1 minute 5 minutes Dgs 8s 10 minutes 30 minutes or until the camerais 16s 16s turned off No limit The shutter speed and 30s 30s aperture displays in the control panel and in 1min viewfinder turn off automatically when the 51 5 min exposure meters turn off in 10 min Dm 30 min o No limit Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life When the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter the auto meter off delay is equivalent to
258. ot metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3 mm 0 12 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewfinder the default area for center weighted metering is shown by the 8 mm circle in the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposure mode Settings P Shutter speed and aperture flexible program pg 107 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 279 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 307 115 F 116 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker Itis most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering see page 102 In exposure mode only the exposure information shown in the electronic analog e
259. ous Mode To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes 1 Select Cu or CL mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL Release mode m dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is 2 pressed all the way down pictures will be taken at up to 6 fps in continuous high speed mode or at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 282 in continuous low speed mode 76 Power Source and Frame Rate The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source used Power source Maximum frame advance rate Battery EN EL3e 6 fps AC adapter 8 fps MB D10 battery pack 2 with EN EL3e battery 6 fps MB D10 battery pack 8 fos 3 with EN EL4a battery p MB D10 battery pack 8 fps3 with AA size batteries 1 Average frame rate with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer Maximum frame advance rate when recording NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG pictures with 14 bit selected for NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth pg 59 is 2 5 fps 2 Maximum frame advance rate with EN EL3e battery is 6 fps even when 7 fps is selected for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shootin
260. p 35 cap rear 34 35 compatible 350 CPU 35 352 distance information 172 focus mode switch 34 35 focus ring 35 71 mounting index 35 non CPU 198 data 199 removing 35 type D 352 type G 352 Lens mount 5 72 Live view 79 Live view mode 80 Hand held 80 Tripod 80 Release mode 81 Live view 79 90 LO 97 Local area network 364 Lock mirror up for cleaning 374 Long exp NR 262 M M 62 71 84 111 Magenta 132 338 Manage Picture Control 156 Manual 62 71 84 111 Mass Storage 225 Matrix 102 103 278 Max continuous release 282 MB D10 274 285 287 323 364 MB D10 battery type 285 Memory buffer 51 74 77 78 Memory card 39 313 369 capacity of 402 formatting 41 313 Metering 102 center weighted 102 277 278 matrix 102 103 278 selector 49 103 spot 102 278 Microdrive 39 369 Mired 133 Mirror 79 93 374 lock up for cleaning 374 Modeling flash 298 Monitor 12 53 79 206 313 cover 19 Monitor off delay 280 Monochrome 337 Black and white 337 Cyanotype 337 Sepia 337 Mounting index 35 MTP PTP 225 319 Multi selector 302 Multi selector center button 301 Multiple exposure 186 Multiple exposure 186 My Menu 344 Add items 344 Rank items 347 Remove items 346 419 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets N NEF 56 58 NEF RAW 56 59 NEF RAW recording 58 NEF
261. page images Press again to display nine images per page Display fewer images Press amp button to zoom in from nine to four images per page Press again to display highlighted image full frame Toggle full frame playback Press center of multi selector to switch back and forth between full frame and thumbnail playback Highlight images Use multi selector to highlight images for full frame playback playback zoom pg 220 or deletion pg 222 Delete highlighted See page 222 for more photo a information Change protect status of On See page 221 for more highlighted photo information Return to shooting mode Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately ER Display menus See page 245 for more information See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 301 219 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Use Description Press amp to zoom in to maximum of approximately Zoom in or Q Qm 27 x large out images 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Press 8 amp 3 to zoom out Wh
262. pes photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the a surrounding 20 focus points Choose when i photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game 3 21 21 points If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 50 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 269 Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will use 3D tracking to track the subject 51 points and select a new focus point as required Use to 3D tracking quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves the viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point 3D 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame a4 Focus Tracking with Lock
263. photography the icon gt in the control panel will blink Immediately before Pp 6 on the next shooting interval begins the shutter ae jet 545 speed display will show the number of intervals TA remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select Interval timer shooting Interval timer shooting between shots While A Stat interval timer photography is in progress the interval timer menu will show the starting time the current time and the number of intervals and shots remaining None of these items can be E GMove OSet 16 49 changed while interval timer photography is in progress Pause BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photography can be paused by e Pressing the amp button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off e Selecting live view self timer or mirror up Mup release modes To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting gt Interval timer shootin
264. plications JPEG fine Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG normal JPEG and one normal quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG basic and one basic quality JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression File Size See page 402 for information on the number of pictures that can be recorded at different image quality and size settings 56 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel QUAL button Main command dial Control panel NEF RAW Recording The NEF RAW recording item in the shooting menu controls compression pg 58 and bit depth pg 59 for NEF RAW images JPEG Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression pg 58 NEF RAW JPEG When photographs taken at NEF RAW JPEG fi
265. r hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right 19 20 The DK 23 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup Before attaching the DK 5 viewfinder eyepiece cap and other viewfinder accessories pp 91 365 remove the DK 23 viewfinder eyepiece cup by placing your fingers underneath the flanges on either side and sliding it off as shown at right The DK 5 viewfinder eyepiece cap is used in self timer pg 91 and interval timer photography pg 191 Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with the D300 1 Charge the battery pg 30 2 Insert the battery pg 32 3 Attach a lens pg 34 5 Turn the camera on pg 44 For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date see page 36 See page 43 for information on adjusting viewfinder focus 21 22 6 Check camera settings pp 44 47 Eremi Jas 3 25 6587 C Image size F Image quality De j White balance 547 _f Number of exposures remaining 150 sensitivity Control panel Viewfinder display 7 Select single servo autofocus pp 49 62 Rotate the focus mode selector to S single servo autofocus Focus and shoot pp 51 52 Press the shutter release press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the photo
266. r the exposure meters turn off 3 AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fia AF lock only Focus locks while the MB D10 AF 0N button is pressed Same as FUNC button The MB D10 AF ON button performs the function selected for Custom Setting f4 pg 303 b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value This option determines whether Option adjustments to sensitivity are made in 1 3 1 3 step default increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 2EV or 4 2 1 2 step 1 EV 1 1step b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV Option Description Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 3 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 1 2 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 2 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 1 EV The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV 1 3 step 13 default 1 1step b3 Exp Comp Fine Tune This option determines whether Option adjustments to exposure and flash 1 3 1 3 step default co
267. r the batteries in the battery pack are used first when an optional MB D10 battery pack is attached Option Description MBD Use MB D10 batteries The camera battery is used only when the first default batteries in the MB D10 are exhausted D300 Use camera battery The batteries in the MB D10 are used only first when the camera battery is exhausted A icon is displayed in the camera control m 125 p562 panel when the batteries in the MB D10 L are in use sale 2 ech The MB D10 Battery Pack The MB D10 takes one EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline Ni MH lithium or nickel manganese batteries an EN EL3e is supplied with the camera EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries are available separately Higher frame rates are available with EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries pg 77 note however that in the case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as battery level drops 287 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 1 320 s When the camera 1 3208 Auto FP shows a a speed of 1 320 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 320 s Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 800 SB 600
268. range finder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only 407 408 Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 8000 30 s in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 1 320 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 1 250 and 1 320 s Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed amp live view self timer Mup mirror up Frame advance rate e With EN EL3e Up to 6 fps e With optional MB D10 multi power battery pack and EN EL4a EN EL4 or AA batteries or with optional EH 5a EH 5 AC adapter Up to 7 CL or 8 fps Ch Self timer Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1 005 segment RGB sensor Metering method e Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data e Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 6 8 10 or 13 mm circle in center of frame or weighting based on average of entire frame fixed at 8 mm when non CPU lens is used Spot Meters 3 mm circle about 2 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus p
269. rast than orange A D o lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays SS Monochrome saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust sharpening saturation Saturation control is not available pH when B amp W black and white is selected E Filter effects foFF fe ra Cyanotype 4 z EA GaGrid WOK Reset Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picure Control was based 155 156 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture SHOOTING MENU White balance AUTO Control y Set Picture Control ED In the shooting menu pg 254 C highlight Manage Picture J com Control and press gt NEIES El ISO sensitivity settings 2 Select Save edit Manage Picture Control a Highlight Save edit and press Ss Load save 3 Select a Picture Control gt Manage Picture Control Choose Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture _ k n har Control and press P orpress gt Ceu to proceedtostep5tosavea gt copy of the highlighted Picture 2 Grid CAdist
270. re The following options are available Method Description tO 3D color matrix Il Recommended in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural results Center weighted bn Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center of y frame defaults to 8 mm circle in center o of viewfinder if CPU lens is attached k area can be selected using Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 277 Classic meter for portraits Center weight area Spot Camera meters circle 3 mm 0 12 in in diameter approximately 2 of frame gt Circle is centered on current focus o point making it possible to meter off ie J center subjects if non CPU lens is used or if Auto area AF is in effect pg 64 camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker Spot metering area For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu pg 199 102 To choose a metering method Metering selector rotate the metering selector until the desired mode is displayed 3D Color Matrix Il Metering In matrix metering exposure is set using
271. rent print order 253 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options The shooting menu contains the options listed below For information on using the shooting menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 24 Shooting menu bank 255 Reset shooting menu 257 Active folder 258 File naming 260 Image quality 56 Image size 60 JPEG compression 58 NEF RAW recording 58 White balance 128 Set Picture Control 148 Manage Picture Control 156 Color space 169 Active D Lighting 168 Long exp NR 262 High ISO NR 263 ISO sensitivity settings 96 Live view 80 Multiple exposure 186 Interval timer shooting 191 254 Shooting Menu Bank Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename
272. rture ring is attached Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached 308 Option Description At the default setting of Off the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu Menus highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is used to and display additional photo information in full frame playback playback pay p p ay and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press the center of the multi selector or f8 Release Button to Use Dial This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released At the default setting of No the button must be pressed while the command dial is rotated If Yes is selected the setting can be changed by rotating the command dial after the button is released Setting ends when the button is pressed again the shutter release
273. s To exit EE without acquiring image dust off data press MENU e Start The message shown at right will iE be displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and control panel Take photo ofbrioht displays G Focs wi be set to ints e Clean sensor and then start Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will rEF appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is rEF complete m Image Sensor Cleaning If the pictures that will be used with Image Dust Off have already been recorded do NOT perform image sensor cleaning before acquiring dust off reference data If image sensor cleaning is performed after the pictures are taken but before dust reference data are acquired Image Dust Off will be unable to locate dust and remove its effects 320 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If th
274. s K less a face quay Camera eo built in flash 30 or less ea 5 m 15 ft or less OF or less Set the remote flash units to the selected channel Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the Speedlight instruction manuals for details Raise the built in flash Press the flash pop up button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock pg 180 can be used if desired The Flash Sync Mode Display 4 does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the E button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The E icon flashes when the built in flash is in mode M 1 Commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monit
275. s HI 0 3 through HI 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV over ISO 3200 ISO 4000 6400 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion LO 0 3 LO 1 The settings LO 0 3 through LO 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 ISO 160 100 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly lower than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 275 For information using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 263 97 98 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control If Off the default setting is chosen for the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user see page 96 If On is chosen ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user flash level is adjusted appropriately The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200 In exposure modes P and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selec
276. s in the buffer recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d5 Max continuous release pg 282 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 402 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Select live view mode to frame pictures in the monitor Rotate the release mode dial to amp Choose live view options in shooting menu pg 80 Hand held pg 83 Tripod pg 86 Sy Raise mirror and display view E TE Frame a picture in the throughlensin P viewfinder and focus Raise mirror and display view through lens in A monitor monitor fem picture in monitor Focus Mirror clicks down and monitor turns off Focus Check view in monitor Press amp button to Monitor turns on when shutter zoom in and release button is pressed check focus
277. s taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX available separately pg 367 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications vV Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting
278. sccssecseecsseecsseecsees 357 Other ACCOSSOVICS cessesssessessesssssssssessessscsnecsessseseessecsseeseeseeeseeseeseesses 364 Caring for the Camera e scssccssssccsssssccsssecssseecssteccesnseecsnseecnsseesesees 370 Storage Cleaning seescccseeeee 370 The Low Pass Filter 371 Clean NOW u ssessscssssecsseecessteeees 371 Clean at Startup Shutdown uu cesssesscssssseceesssseessecnssecs 372 Manual Cleaning ssssscsssssscssssccssseccssseesssseccsnecessueecssneeeseneeees 374 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions 377 Troubleshooting ssccsessccssssecessesccssscecsssescessesccssececuneeseesscessuseesenseess 381 EBV OR MICSSAGES E E E 388 APPENA simiarennannrenininenun nana an ae Specifications te EY EEE N TEA EES xvii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame A Tum off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subje
279. sessseesccsessecssesenseess Connections 223 CONNECTING to a COMPUTE cesssessssesseessessssessessssesseasseessesssess 224 Direct USB Connection sssssseesesessseorosesusoeesssseorosssnooeeesoooosssssee 226 Wireless and Ethernet Networks uu csscssssesscsecssseesecenseeeeseene 229 Printing Photographs cssseccsessccseseecssssscesseecsseeecsnesecesneeessneeess 230 Direct USB CONNECTION es eesssssessssetecsssesssssecssseessssseesssnseeess 231 Viewing Photographs ON TV cssecsssscssscessseccstecsscecsseessnecesneeessees 242 Standard Definition Devices oe essssssscsssseescsessssesecsnneeceesnee 242 High Definition Devices csescsssssecsssseccsseesessseesssesccseeseseeeeees 244 Menu Guide 245 gt The Playback Menu Managing IMages ssssccssssccseecees 246 Delet anenai iee iia iieii 248 Playback Folder sssrinin 249 Hide Image Display Mode Image Review After Delete i Rotate Tall scssssscssssesssccsssescccesseseccesssesscsesnsseesecsnseseseensseesseene Slide SOW isnin rininis iiias Print Set DPOF cisssscciscccsssssacasssscccscisssccodsennedosapesecpsbssccasersoscasves 253 xiii i The Shooting Menu Shooting OptionS ssssssssssssssssssessses 254 Shooting Menu Bank u ecssssecssssscccnsecessseccssesceentecssneeeeenseees 255 Reset Shooting M Nnu cssccsssssccssessessecsssseeccsneeeesntecesseteesee 257 Active Folder siccsssscssssceasicsisasesssssscsstonssissesiaisnaseesaseaasst
280. sessssssssrsesssereesssssseesss 156 Active D LIQhtinng esssssssssssssssecsssesceesssceseesecsseeesnneescesescenneeeeunecs 167 Color SPacCe esscssssccsecsssecsssecsssccssscessccsstecsssccsssecssccesscecsueecsucessnseesnsees 169 Flash Photography 171 The Built in Flash oe eeessssecsseecsssccsseecssecesscecssecsssccessecsneecsnceesnsecsnecsees 172 Using the Built in FlaSh sssssssssssssssesssssssssssssesesesstsosusssesonsesssosesssse 173 Hash MOGOS cisccscescansautits ixcastids svacisasedescrsenstcdiemncnvndeateeantitiesacan 176 Flash COMPENSATION cssssssssssssesssesssessesssesssesssecssecsecsnsceseccsseeseens 178 FV MEOCK TEE A E aces epncnsteesaisbissstsss 180 Other Shooting Options 183 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings 00 sess 184 Multiple ExPOSUure cssssssecssescsssecssscessscssscscssseesscsesscessneessneessneecsees 186 Interval Timer Photograph y sssccsssssccsssecsnseecessseessnseeeessneeees 191 Non CPU LENSES niiina annia 198 Using a GPS Uitsaai 201 More About Playback 205 Full Frame Playback ssscsssssecssssecsssssccssssecssssecsnssecesseeessnsneessneeees Photo INFOMATION eeccsssccsssccssscsssccsseccsstcccssecsssccssceesnccssnecesneessseests Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM ssssssssssssscsseesecsseesenseees Protecting Photographs from Deletion secssssessessseescnnees Deleting Individual Photographs sesssse
281. ss Option Description The image sensor is automatically cleaned N Clean at startup each time the camera is turned on The image sensor is automatically cleaned anr Clean at OUFF during shutdown each time the camera is shutdown turned off N Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at F amp shutdown startup and at shutdown a Cleaning off BE S S default Automatic image sensor cleaning off vV Image Sensor Cleaning The following interrupt image sensor cleaning raising the built in flash pressing the shutter release depth of field preview or AF ON button or using FV lock Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually pg 374 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait 373 BE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor pg 371 option in the setup menu the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized servi
282. sseectcesercscoecetesesvsdcuseceesvess pg 176 Flash Compensation csscssescsssssssscsecscssccsecersecares pg 178 EV LOCK sstcccccccccstctcessscsseccscsecttesssestsesascecseceeseesuescuceose sizes pg 180 171 172 The Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F It supports i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR which uses monitor pre flashes to adjust flash output for balanced lighting not only when natural lighting is inadequate but when filling in shadows and backlit subjects or adding a catch light to the subject s eyes The following types of i TTL flash control are supported i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1 005 segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see pg 198 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level
283. sssssssssssscsseesssecsssssescsssecess 283 d7 Shooting Info Display ss sssssssssssssssresssssereesssssreessssenresse d8 LCD IlluMINation sssssssssssssssesssssesssseessseessseeesssressseessseeesssee d9 Exposure Delay Mode d10 MB D10 Battery Type d11 Battery Order ssssssssssssssessssssseresssssereeessosererssseneessseseeessse e Bracketing Flash sssssssssssssseesssseessssesssseesssseessseessseessseeessseessseee e1 Flash Sync Speed sssssseesssssseesssssseeessssseeeessssereeesssessessse e2 Flash Shutter Speed e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash e4 Modeling Flash 0 m e5 Auto Bracketing Set ssssssssssssesssssseressssseresessssrreessssereee 298 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M ssssssssseccssssccseesssetecesseees 299 e7 Bracketing OFdel sessccsseccsssecssseseccssecsssesecsseesssneecesneees 300 Fei GOMUrOlS eis sssacssacsssscsstesasssencsscotansconesazaresesesassataeatac vtsazconvaesrtsscaceaseze 301 f1 Multi Selector Center Button 301 f2 Multi Selector seeecccseeeceseees 302 f3 Photo Info Playback 302 f4 Assign FUNC Button ssesssssscccseccssesccssseccesntecesseeesnseees 303 f5 Assign Preview BUtON ssesccsseccsssseccsseeseeneecssseeeeenseees 306 f6 Assign AE L AF L BUttonn seesssssssesssccsssessssessssessecsnseeses 307 f7 Customize Command Dials 0 eessssescccsescesseeeeeseeeeeneees 308 f8 Release Button to Use Dial 309 f9
284. stage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility B
285. t MTP PTP pg a 225 Y lt W Mass Storage ic TET MTP PTP Turn the camera off 3 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 4 Turn the camera on 232 A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display PictBridge 100ND300 _ DSC_000 15 12 2007 10 15 2 EE Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or gt to view additional pictures or press the amp button to zoom in on the current frame pg 220 To view six pictures at a time press the 9 button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press amp to display the highlighted picture full frame AS 100ND300 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007 10 15 29 4288x2848 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options a Setup Start printing Page size No of copies Border Time stamp g Cropping 233 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press to select Option Description Page size Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to se
286. t lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications 211 212 BE Shooting Data 1 or MTR SPD AP FOCAL LENGTH LENS 3 r i 4 5 6 7 8 9 AF VR FLASH MODE NIKON D300 1 Protect Status cesses 221 2 Retouch indicator 329 3 Metering method 102 Shutter speed ou 108 111 Aperture ou ecsesccescssssseeseeee 109 111 4 Exposure MOC cssseeescesseees 104 ISO sensitivity 7 scsssccsssseeees 96 5 Exposure compensation 116 Optimal exposure tuning 277 6 Focal length n sesssssssseccesssees 356 7 Lens data nnn eesscsssseessccssseseeene 198 1 2 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure B WT F4 8 p EXP MODE ISO_ P 200 j H EXP TUNING 1 3 5 6 35mm 18 200 S VR Bult in TTL 1 3 ZORKO CMD M TTL 3 0 a E 43 0 B OFF C Pre On b 8 FOCUS Mode ssssesssssssssssesssssseeeee 62 Lens VR vibration reduction 4 9 Flash Mode a Flash compensation 178 10 Commander mode group name flash control mode flash COMPENSATION 0 eecceesseessssesssees 294 11 Camera name 12 Folder number frame NUMDEL cecsesssesssesseees 258 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display model pg 250 Displayed in red if photo was taken
287. tate the main command dial to choose the exposure mode Choose the exposure mode pg 104 Wie LON 2 N MODE button Main command dial Control panel Use the command dials to adjust exposure Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed exposure mode P pg 107 AE L Ries Exposure mode P command dial Control panel Choose a shutter speed exposure mode S or M pp 108 111 iz L w _ Exposure mode Sor M command dial Control panel Choose an aperture exposure mode A or M pp 109 111 aC OE Exposure mode Aor Mi Sub command dial Control panel Set exposure compensation pg 116 Activate or cancel bracketing select number of shots in bracketing sequence pp 119 122 Select bracketing q Va exposure increment ES gt pg 120 M Fn button Sub command dial Control panel Fn button Main command dial Control panel The Fn Button Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 303 the Fn button and command dials can be used to select shutter speed and aperture in steps of 1 EV to choose pre specified lens data for non CPU lenses or to select dynamic area AF The Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings
288. ted for Minimum shutter speed Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity When On is selected the control panel 6 5B and viewfinder show IS0 AUTO When P SEEEN A sensitivity is altered from the value selected u _ ea by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder 558 oou Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 263 Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or Mand choose a larger aperture 99 100 Exposure Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure This section describes the options available to control exposure including metering exposure mode exposure lock exposure compensation and bracketing Metern eae e aE eenas Exposure MOdE i erseesesseserereenteesesresttitetsees ee eerestei ok eser R Programmed Auton ee aea terete 5 Shutter Priority Auto A Aperture Priority Auto n Manuale A A E Autoexposure AE LOCK sessssesesesessssosososesessosososesesso Exposure Compensation Bracketing ee e AAEEen ies 101 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposu
289. th Image 1 Xx Doom Wielect highlighted 2 Display NEF RAW images E Image overlay lt Image 1 Press A picture selection fra Kem RA j 100 1 100 2 100 3 dialog will be displayed e 5 Ra d 100 4 100 5 4100 6 Zoom OK 3 Highlight a photograph E Image overlay Image 1 i Press AY lt or P to highlight F FEIRA the first photograph in the f a N a ae es overlay To view the highlighted photograph full xwy Dom OK frame press and hold the amp button 339 4 Select the highlighted i Image overlay photog raph s Image 1 Image2 Preview Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display Eize0mn selec The selected image will appear as Image 1 5 Set gain gt Image overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or W to select the gain for image 1 N f from values between 0 1 and XW Ozom Wselect 2 0 The default value is 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column 6 Select the second F Image overlay photograph 3 Image 1 Image2 Preview Press lt or gt to highlight Image 2 Repeat Steps 2 5to f select the second photo and x7 Ooo selec adjust gain 7 Highlight the Preview Image overlay column 7 Image1 Image 2 Press lt or gt to highlight the X0 5 XS Preview column Zoom
290. the WB button and rotating the sub command dial HE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance E White balance option Select White balance in the shooting menu pg 254 then f highlight a white balance NV GEE option and press If an option other than Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 144 before proceeding 131 132 2 Fine tune white balance E White balance Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and V the green G magenta M Coordinates Adjustment axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G 4 Blue B Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue lt q Increase amber Press 8 Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the control panel White Balance Fin
291. the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter pg 364 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Insert a Memory Card The camera stores photographs on CompactFlash and microdrive memory cards available separately pg 369 The following section describes how to insert and format a memory card 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards Power switch Open the card slot cover Unlatch the card slot cover and open the card slot Insert the memory card Insert the memory card with the front label toward the monitor D When the memory card is fully inserted the green access lamp will light briefly and the eject button will pop up vV Inserting Memory Cards Insert the memory card terminals first Inserting the card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation Access lamp Directi
292. the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to x 25a or to values between 30 s 3a and 1 8 000 s a aa Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects high shutter speeds to freeze motion Fast shutter speed 1 1 600 s Slow shutter speed 1 6 s 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 390 for information on what to do if flashing tus amp amp indicator appears in the shutter speed displays Ai Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode A Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel 2 Choose an aperture Rotate the sub command dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum Sub command dial and maximum for the lens Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field see page 105 bringing both foreground and background into focus Large apertures low f numbers soften background details in portraits or other compositions that emphasize the main subject mm 547 Small aperture f 36 Lange aperture f 8 109 110 3 Fram
293. the white balance menu pg 254 129 130 Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Choose a color temperature use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg 298 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 118 for more information Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing
294. tial installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet ona circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D300 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects
295. time Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken A message will be displayed in the monitor one minute before each series of shots is taken If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of tir bb is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor The Viewfinder Eyepiece Cap In exposure modes other than manual cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 193 194 M out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting pg 195 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure and or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer
296. ting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description sRGB sRGB default Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification Adobe Adobe RGB This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched 1 Select Color space Highlight Color space in the shooting menu pg 254 and press gt E SHOOTNGMENU 1G White balance AUTO Set Picture Control ED Manage Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting OFF TE Long exp NR OFF High ISO NR OFF El ISO sensitivity settings a 2 Selecta color space Highlight the desired option and press ira gt Color space Le PEE sRGB GK ic TE Adobe Adobe RGB 169 170 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB
297. tment by processing images according to the color of the light source This is known as white balance This chapter covers white balance settings White Balance OptionS sessssssesessssssosososescosososeseseoso pg 128 Fine Tuning White Balance scssssscssssssesessceeees pg 131 Choosing a Color Temperature csccccsscsecsescseees pg 135 Preset Manali oaeee AAE pg 136 127 128 White Balance Options For natural coloration choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting The following options are available Color temp Option K Description White balance is adjusted automatically using color temperature measured by image Auto 3 500 sensor and 1 005 segment RGB AUTO default 8 000 sensor For best results use type G d or D lens If built in or optional flash is used white balance reflects conditions in effect when the flash goes off z Incandescent 3 000 Use under incandescent lighting yk Fluorescent Use under following seven light sources Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 Use under sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues Warm white Use under warm white fluorescent 3 000 i fluorescent lights White fluorescent 3 700 Use under white fluorescent lights Cool white fluorescent 4 200 Use under cool white fluorescent lights Day white fluorescent 5 000 Userundern daylight white fluorescent lights Daylight
298. ture Control to create a combination of sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue for a particular scene or effect e Create custom Picture Controls pg 156 Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired e Share custom Picture Controls pg 160 Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX supplied and other compatible software or software created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera e Manage custom Picture Controls pg 163 Rename or delete custom Picture Controls Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software 149 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for natural results Choose for ENL Neutral photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched
299. ual this guide e Quick Guide e Software Installation Guide e Software Suite CD ROM e Registration card U S A only Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used IV This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation Microdrive is a trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and other countries All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders D300 Introduction Tutorial KA Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode EJ ISO Sensitivity Exposure M White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photography Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes Q amp A Index Find what you re looking for using this question and a
300. unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Enable Auto meter off delay This reduces the drain on the default battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is connected GPS data will always be recorded Disable e Position This item is only available if a GPS device is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading as reported by the GPS device Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20cm 8in from the camera Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock 203 204 More About Playback Playback Options This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback Full Frame Playback sscssssesessssssosssessscssesesessnces pg 206 Photo INformation ceccsscsesscscscsesessssccssssececsceenes pg 208 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback pg 218 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM
301. urning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap 1 CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring pg 352 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number See the lens manual for details Lens An AF S DX VR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes Mounting index Focal length index Focus mode switch pg 34 CPU contacts pg 352 zoomi ring Focus ring pg 71 VR mode switch 35 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date 1 Turn the camera on 36 Power switch 2 Select Language Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu For information on using menus see Using Camera Menus pg 26 SETUP MENU e Format memory card LCD brightness 0 Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning EA Video mode f HDMI AUTO World time oo a En 3 Selecta language Press A or W to highlight the desired language and press fy Language De En Es Fi E Fr It NI 1 id Deutsch English Espa ol Suomi Frangais Italiano Nederlands Polski 4 Select World time SETUP MENU j e Format memory c
302. use optional diopter adjustment lenses Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery 44 Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay 279 280 or c4 Monitor off delay Unusual characters See A Note on Electronically displayed in control panel Controlled Cameras below Displays in control panel The response times and brightness or viewfinder are of these displays varies with unresponsive and dim temperature Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted Viewfinder is out of focus 43 Displays turn off without warning 381 These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again In the event of ep continued malfunction contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the prob
303. uto power zoom 24 105 mm 24 85 mm 3 Wide panel 14mm 17 mm 14mm 60 down i 7 down 90 up 90 up 180 __ _ _ toward lens Head rotation 180 left 90 right left 90 right 90 up light axis 45 up away from light axis 1 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 2 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 at 35 mm zoom head position 3 27 mm zoom coverage 4 24 mm zoom coverage SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 The following features are available with the SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 S
304. val timer shooting OFF 2 Select Number of shots P Multiple exposure e Highlight Number of shots and press gt Y Done 1 Number of shots 2 gt fe Auto gain ON Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review pg 251 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 280 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 3 Select the number of shots BS Multinle exposure Gy Number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 4 Select Auto gain K Multiple exposure Le Highlight Auto gain and press E sca gt cx Number of shots 2 R 2 5 Set gain E Multiple exposure E Auto gain Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures On default actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 1 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures etc off Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark 187 6 Select Done F Multiple exposure Le Highlight Done and press 2 A icon will be displayed in tom qe Auto gain i the control panel To exit without taking a multiple exposure select Mu
305. values between 250 and 1 60 s 8 000 to 1 60 s when an optional flash unit is used with Auto FP High Speed sync Sync pg 357 Red eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes to contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused 4 by flash Owing to one second shutter release delay this mode is not recommended with moving subjects Red eye E k or in other situations in which quick shutter response reduction i A is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction lamp is lit Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for sLow 3 portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Available only in programmed auto and aperture Red eye priority auto exposure modes Use of a tripod is reduction with recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera slow sync shake Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to capture both subject and background at night or sLow under dim light This mode is only available in programmed auto and aperture priority auto Slow sync exposure modes Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 176 Flash mode Description Rear curtain sync In shutter priority auto or manual exposure mode flash fires just before the shutter closes Use to create effect of a stream of light behind moving objects In programmed auto and aperture priority auto slow
306. wfinder will show If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL3e battery and no memory card inserted will be displayed in the control panel E Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting T Turn the camera on Power switch Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder display focus points and AF area brackets are in sharp focus When operating the diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye Diopter Diopter can be adjusted in the range 2 m to 1 m Corrective lenses available separately pg 365 allow diopters of 5 m to 3 m 43 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch OO 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control eam panel or viewfinder fcustouy wA Icon Control panel
307. with other lenses or teleconverters The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the button m Shooting information on Shooting information off Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the amp button while the view through the monitor is displayed Press A or W to adjust brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live view release the gt button HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right Remote Cords If the shutter release button on a remote cord available separately see pg 368 is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode it will activate contrast detect autofocus If the remote cord shutter release button is pressed all the way down without focusing focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken 89 p 90 m Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at t
308. xposure display is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder button 0 EV E4 button pressed m E 0 3 EV Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 1 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 1EV No exposure 1 EV compensation At values other than 0 the 0 at the center of the electronic analog exposure displays will flash and a 4 icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the electronic analog exposure display by pressing the amp button Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine tunel pg 275 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the 4 button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 276 117 118 Bracketing The D300 offers thre

Nikon D300

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents